JP6548414B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a drum-type gaming machine (also referred to as a "pachislot machine" or "slot machine").

  A plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols are rotatably arranged in a general conventional reel-type gaming machine (game machine). When a game is started in such a gaming machine, the symbols are variably displayed on the display area in the display window as the reels rotate. Thereafter, when a stop operation for stopping the reels is performed and all the reels stop, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area in the display window as the game result. Then, based on the stop mode (stopped eyes) of the symbol displayed to be stopped, a benefit such as the payout of gaming value (for example, a medal) is given.

  In the above-described gaming machine, a lottery on the winning combination is performed at the start of each game, and the result of the game is basically derived based on the result of the lottery. In addition, many of such gaming machines are provided with a display device (typically, a liquid crystal display) capable of displaying an image, and the display device is used to display an effect on various timings in game progress. By doing this, a device has been devised to enhance the gameplay (for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2004-33472

However, although the device as described above is applied, there is a considerable possibility that the player gets used to the game and the amusement becomes reduced.

  Therefore, in view of the above-described problems, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the amusement of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of movable bodies having a plurality of symbols, a start operation means for rotating the plurality of movable bodies, and the plurality of movable bodies. All of the plurality of movable bodies are stopped, and the winning combination determining means for determining one of the winning combinations among the plurality of winning combinations based on the operation of the start operation means. A privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player based on a combination of symbols , and a delay means for delaying a time from when the start operation means is operated to when the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective. It is a gaming machine provided, and the winning combination includes a pressing response combination in which a benefit provided by the benefit giving device is different according to the operation mode of the stop operation device, and the pressing combination determining device performs the pressing versus When the role is determined, the first display device and the second display device can be made to show an indication display indicating the operation mode of the stop operation means in which the benefit given by the benefit giving means becomes advantageous. The instruction display shown on the first display device is not changed when the operation to the stop operation means is performed under the situation where the instruction display is shown on the first display device and the second display device. However, the instruction display shown on the second display device can be changed to a display different from the instruction display and can be displayed, and does not change even when the operation to the stop operation means is performed The instruction display shown on the display unit 1 is displayed immediately before the acceptance of the operation of the stop operation means is permitted, and the start operation means is operated by the delay means. Gaming machine, wherein the one in which the operation of the stop operation means even when the operation is delayed the time until the effective stop operation means accepting is shown just before it is allowed from being created.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the amusement of the game.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. It is Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. 4 which shows the state to which the connector holder was moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. (A) is a Z2 part enlarged view of FIG. 7, (b) is a Z2 part enlarged view of FIG. 7 which shows the state to which the connector holder was moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine principal part which shows the back board side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a symbol variation display which shows other forms of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relation between a case member and a stopper by the side of an outside main part. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a symbol variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a slot machine upper part. It is a perspective view which abbreviate | omits a medal discharge | release apparatus and shows the lower half of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of FIG. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the heat release port viewed from the back side of the slot machine. FIG. 18 is a front view, partly in cross section, of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the power supply device from the bottom. The other form is shown and it is a principal part sectional view of a side plate of an outside main part, and a power supply device. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emission unit. It is a perspective view of a door type front member which disassembles and shows a transparent board. It is a sectional view equivalent to a Drawing 33A-A line of a door type front member equipped with a transparent board. It is an exploded and assembled perspective view of a hinge fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door type front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door type front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupler vertically. It is an important section top view of the door type front member which shows the example of other hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and frame member in a model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door type | formula front member, having connected the coupler. It is the expanded view which expand | deployed planarly the symbol row of a reel belt. FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front; It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanical elements, electronic devices, the operation member etc. with which the slot machine is equipped. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. It is a figure showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of a medal, etc. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of a medal, etc. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of a medal, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the basic one game in a slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of starting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of game state transition control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a rough process of instruction | indication function processing. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows the detailed process sequence of instruction | indication function generation | occurrence | production processing. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows the detailed process sequence of instruction | indication function generation | occurrence | production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an indication function related process. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the initial game number addition top hit lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the number-of-initial-games addition game number lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for AT first hit lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the lottery table used for a omen lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a omen lottery. FIG. 17 is a diagram (part 3) for describing the lottery table used for the omen lottery. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining a lottery table used for a lottery game number lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a motive game number lottery. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a motive game number lottery. It is FIG. (4) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a motive game number lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the lottery table used for state transfer lottery A. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for state transfer lottery A. It is a figure (the 3) for explaining the lottery table used for state transfer lottery A. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for a special state transition lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for special state game number lottery. FIG. 17 is a diagram (part 1) for describing a lottery table used for state transition lottery B. FIG. 21 is a second diagram illustrating the lottery table used in the state transition lottery B. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of AT lottery game state in the instruction | indication function generation | occurrence | production process of each example. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the indication function display of a 1st example. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the indication function display of a 1st example. It is a figure for demonstrating the indicator used by the pointing function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific display example of the indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure (1) for explaining a display example of an indication function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining a display example of an indication function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the group display in an indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific display example of the indication function display of a 1st example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display period by various displays etc. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the display period by various displays etc. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the lottery table used for a serial effect generation lottery. FIG. 21 is a second diagram illustrating the lottery table used for the continuous effect occurrence lottery. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) for describing a lottery table used for continuous effect content lottery. FIG. 21 is a second diagram illustrating the lottery table used for continuous effect content lottery; It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game completion determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of AT game determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by special display LED. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence example of the power failure return process in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of a display period at the time of error generating in a 1st embodiment (the 1). It is a timing chart which shows the example of a display period (the 2) at the time of error generating in a 1st embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of a display period (the 3) at the time of error generating in a 1st embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of a display period (the 4) at the time of error generating in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing a display period example (No. 1) when the power failure return process shown in FIG. 105 is performed during the game. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period (part 2) when the power failure return process shown in FIG. 105 is performed during the game. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 3) when the power failure return process shown in FIG. 105 is performed during the game. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1b. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1b. 15 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1c. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1c. 15 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in slot machine 1d. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1d. 15 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1e. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1e. 15 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1 e. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1f. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error generation in the slot machine 1f. 45 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1 f.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described by taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example with reference to the drawings. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is the door-shaped front member omitted 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 7 is a door-shaped front member 8 (a) is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7; FIG. 8 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved; 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view with the cover of the wiring relay member omitted, FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are sectional views of the main parts showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol change display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the lower half of the slot machine with the medal discharging device omitted and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 shows heat dissipation from the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device as seen from below, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another form, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member shown in an exploded manner of a transparent plate and a light emitting unit, FIG. Is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member fitted with the transparent plate, and FIG. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, Fig. 38 is a cross sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, Fig. 39 is a cross sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the process of opening 41 is a perspective view of the upper half of the door-shaped front member seen from the back side, and FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of an essential part of a door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of an essential part showing an opening process of the door-shaped front member of FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while connecting the connecting members.

[1. First embodiment]
The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, has a box-shaped outer body 100 with an open front, and a laterally open front of the outer body 100 with a rotation shaft 100a. A door-shaped front member 200 rotatably mounted in the form of a door, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving means, and an opening 401 on the front which is detachable from the outer body 100 It has the case member 400 and the image display body 500 which displays arbitrary images.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has the side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right of the bottom plate 101 and the top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102, 102. The back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame and formed in a box shape that is open only at the front. The left and right side plates 102 are shaped like a trapezoid in which the front edge is slightly inclined in a rearward inclined state, so that the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearward inclined state. In addition, a plurality (in the embodiment, the top board 103 in a region facing the upper cross bar 600 of the gaming machine installation island (see FIG. 25 imaginary line) in the state installed in the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through holes 132, 132...

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf plate-shaped partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal, and as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. The vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A cylindrical projection (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring (metal processing to raise a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch) The cylindrical projections are inserted into small holes (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and positioned. Further, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal emitting device 110 for releasing a medal serving as a game medium to a medal receiving tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200; An auxiliary storage box for medals 111, which stores medals that overflow, and a power supply device 112 are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal discharge device]
The medal discharging device 110 is a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means attached with a hopper 110b for storing medals, and a medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the outlet 110c by the operation of the drive means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow weir 110d for discharging the overflowed medals, and the above-described medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the tip end of the overflow weir 110d. In addition, as the medal release mechanism of the medal release device 110, any known mechanism may be adopted at present, and therefore the detailed description will be omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply device]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to the inner corner portion where the three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 facing the front, and the back plate 104 are orthogonal. There is. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electric components such as the medal discharge device 110 and easily generating heat. Therefore, heat is dissipated to the mounting portion of the power supply device 112 on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112 a of the power supply device 112 is formed of transparent synthetic resin. By doing this, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an illegal work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) and the like of the power supply device 112. The device case 112 a includes an upper surface plate 112 b covering the upper surface, a back surface plate 112 c facing the back surface plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front surface plate 112 d covering the opposite side of the back surface plate 112 c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the side to be headed, an inclined plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  The side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex portion 102a as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and an upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is formed under the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that makes one side dive. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint portion of the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter can not be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is in the form of a groove. In this example, the edge of the top plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is shown. It is fitted in the groove.

  As described above, when the side of the device case 112a of the power supply device 112 in contact with the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, the inside of the device case 112a The incorporation of the substrate 112s and the like is easy to perform using the open surface, and since the attachment to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are incorporated in the device case 112a is unnecessary, the workability is improved.

  A large number of vent holes 112g, 112g, ... are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a to prevent heat from accumulating inside. . The device case 112a is raised on an elevated floor type by legs 112h, 112h ... provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100. Accordingly, lower-layer relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the vent holes 112g, 112g. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment is in communication with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air on the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. The height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be obtained by forming an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i at the boundary between the back plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a. Even if there is a gap in height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k which is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion which protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 It is fixed to the outer main body 100 by the combination of 112 m and the heat radiation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

  That is, the outline of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the back surface plate 112c of the device case 112a, so the power supply 112 strikes the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation port 104a. Further, a protrusion 112m protruding from the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a is at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It comprises a piece 112m-1 and a vertical piece 112m-2 which is inscribed in the longitudinal side of the heat radiation port 104a to resist the lateral movement of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply by pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a, the upward direction (lifting) of the rear surface (rear side) of the device case 112a Fixing in the right direction (roll over) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the lower direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply 112 can be completely restricted except in the pulling direction to the front side by a simple operation of simply inserting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are bored in the attachment piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q through at least one of the through holes 112p. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled toward the front, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with a single wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power supply cord (not shown) for receiving supply of electricity from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. And although the bulging part was conventionally provided in the side of the said heat dissipation port 104a and the said power supply cord was pulled out from there, even if it bundles a power supply cord in this position, there is a high possibility that it may slip on the ground. The slot machine 1 may turn on the power during manufacture, and at this time, it is necessary to put out the power cord outside the outer main body 100 in preparation for movement on the manufacturing line or between the lines. During the movement of the slot machine 1, the power cord may slip on the ground or may get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and pinched.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment extends the cord outlet port 104b from the upper side upward, and pulls out the power cord from there. Thus, a height sufficient to hang the bundled power cords in a suspended state can be secured. Therefore, the trouble of damaging the power cord accidentally in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present invention sets the power supply 112 at the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screws in one wood screw 112 q to complete the installation. Significant labor saving of the installation work is possible. Further, in the present invention, since fixation is completed by screwing to one surface, it is easy to visually recognize when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply 112 in particular and can be fixed reliably. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw on a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 may be forgotten because they are difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, since the heat radiation port 104a is required as a cooling means of the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiation port 104a is used to fix the power supply device 112, almost no extra process or cost occurs. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide with each other for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, in the case where the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting protrusion 112m can be integrally formed, so that the cost is hardly incurred. Therefore, the total cost required to attach the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared to the conventional case.

  Furthermore, in the case where the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the stepped portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as measures against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with little cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is accommodated in the space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 has a wiring relay member 113 as a core of wiring means described later. It is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a vent 133 for heat radiation is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door type front member]
The front side of the door-shaped front member 200 is shown in FIG. 3 and the back side of the door-shaped front member 200 is shown in FIG. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal receptacle 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 has an insertion slot 203 for medal insertion, and a single-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal from medals stored as data in a memory of a main substrate 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX input button 206 instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) usable in one game, and a medal return for returning the medals packed in the medal selector 207 described later to the medal receiver 201 A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (a release command by settlement) stored in the memory of the main substrate 409 as data, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300. And three reel stop bars for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Down 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and is not limited thereto.

  Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion port 203, and a medallion 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return lever 213 is connected below. The medal selector 207 is a known switch that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). Also, in the game state where the insertion of medals is refused, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return rod 213 side. When the door type front member 200 is in the closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip end of the medal 樋 212 faces inside the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110. The medals flowing to the medal 樋 212 pass through to the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return rod 213 is connected to the medal receiver 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the inlet 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return rod 213 return to the medal receiver 201.

[3-1. Door type front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a transparent window for a game covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. It has become 214. The transparent window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side vertically, and an image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integral with the door type front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided up and down. Thus, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is vertically switched. But you can use it as it is.

[3-1-1. Door type front member-perspective window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, rubber-containing methacrylic resin excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acripet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.). Edge part 214b which bulges toward the front side with the side facing the player as the front on the peripheral edge of the three sides (right and left side and upper side) excluding the bottom side. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is integrally molded on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the transparent plate 214a is the above-described one because the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to enhance the overall strength of the transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 as described above, bending or distortion hardly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure (not solid but having a space inside, such as a shell having an open space), and the thickness of each portion is arbitrary. The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having, for example, a pattern or characters on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is illustrated as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214 b is not limited to that illustrated, and can be arbitrarily changed in accordance with the design of the light emitting unit 217 or the decorative member. Moreover, the site | part which provides the edge member 214b is not limited to three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a like embodiment, It is sufficient to just provide in any one side at least.

  In addition, reference numerals 218 in FIGS. 33 and 34 denote fixing members provided at left and right corner portions on the transparent plate 214a, and screws which pass through the through holes 214c (see enlarged view in FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown) it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 serves as a decorative corner, while the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view in FIG. 33) provided at the upper corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It functions as a nut that is screwed into a screw (not shown) that passes from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  In FIGS. 33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member for supporting the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at an angle so as to reflect the light of the rod-like light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1 more. In the configuration in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, since the light emitting body 217a can be disposed on the front side of the slot machine 1, it is like a lighthouse at the tip of a cap It is advantageous when the light is emitted towards the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the upper side is set to reflect more light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be turned on during a game, particularly when a big hit is made, to perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. As described above, by performing the rendering with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, the player who has won the big hit can be made to pay attention, and since the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, the game becomes more exciting. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operation rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the big hit is out.

  The transparent plate 214a according to the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and a plate-like bottom side of the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view in FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door front member 200 Inserting from the front side at an angle and fitting into the fitting type, in that state the transparent plate 214a is erected to make all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b abut the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, It fixes by the screw 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cutaway view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time, and it is apparent from FIG. 35 that, if it is assumed that the player is a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Although there is no room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, an excellent crime prevention effect is exhibited.

[3-2. Door type front member-lock device]
At one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200, a lock device 215 which is opened and closed using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided.

[4. Design fluctuation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotary display device, and for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c which can be individually rotated by drive means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are assembled and stored. It has a device case 302 and is known to play a game by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c.

  The device case 302 is a deformed hexagonal column except for three faces directed to the front (player) from the octagonal pillar which has been turned over, and the bottom plate 304, the top plate portion 305, and the right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between top plate portion 305 and rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308 And a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c protrudes from the front of the device case 302. As shown in FIG.

  Further, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 which can be changed between a use possible state in which fingers can be used and a non-use state lying down on the top plate portion 305. To carry.

  As described above, the configuration in which the handle 311 which can be changed as described above is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is closely related to the measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, thereby giving the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to make the image display body 500 cantilever. Since such reinforcing bars 402 cross the opening 401, they obviously interfere with the insertion and removal of the device case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and is lowered on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, only by providing the handle 311 which can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in a direction crossing the opening 401 in the opening 401 of the case member 400. Become. Incidentally, in the case of the conventional apparatus case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and it becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

  Although the handle 311 of the embodiment is structured to swing and change between the upright use state and the inactive state, the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the inactive state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belts 314, 314 are cut and raised in the top plate portion 305, and made of synthetic resin or leather, for example, in the belts 314, 314. The use state where the finger can be used, such as a structure in which the band-like handle 311 provided is inserted, and the center is raised from the lowered non-use state in FIG. It may be any structure as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is protruded from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 according to the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 By pulling, the case member 400 can be easily put in and out.

[5. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. And a top plate 406 covering the upper surfaces of the side plates 404 and 404, and has a box shape having an opening 401 on the front surface.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404 and 404, the back plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plates 404 and 404 and the opening 401 inside the top plate 406 are metal reinforced. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 is bridged between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. Further, the image below the reinforcing bar 402 as an installation area of the symbol variation display device 300 and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 as an installation area of the image display body 500 The area enclosed by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as the wiring work space 408, and the main board 409 which is the main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the back plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. Control boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  In the top plate 406 of the case member 400, skylights 443, 443 are formed as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two on both sides of a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406, and each of the skylight portions 443 and 443 has an axis passing through the through holes 132 and 132 of the outer main body 100. In the area including the intersection point, the opening is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132. However, the front side peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found out with reference to the periphery of the skylight portion 443. Therefore, even if the operator looks into the skylight portion 443, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as the opening portion of the present invention. That is, by providing the plurality of skylights 443 as the opening on the top surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight, and it is possible to further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410 and 410 are provided on the outer surface of the rear face plate 405 of the case member 400, and the boss 410 is used as a back plate of the outer main body 100. It is fitted and positioned in boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104. The bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411 described later, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer main body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. Thus, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a recessed step 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the recessed step 412 fits into the stepped portion 106 of the partition 105. The end of the recessed step 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side is provided with a tapered portion 413 directed to expand rearward, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the stepped portion 106 of the partition 105 and the case member 400 The fitting with the recessed portion 412 can be smoothly performed. Thus, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the engagement of the recessed step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a recessed groove is laid or integrally pressed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. It is also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, the rail member 116 in a convex form is laid or integrally pressed on the partition plate 105, while ridges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail members 116 may be held by the wedges 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the stopper 117 in the form of a rocking lever shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18 and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. The stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 and to two fixtures 118 and 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103, as shown by a solid line in FIG. In the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400, by manually switching between an operation posture in which the case member 400 is engaged and a non-operation posture in which the case member 400 is not engaged as in FIG. Regulate the movement. When the stopper 117 is keyed as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  In addition, the stopper 117 axially attached to the attachment 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the locking hole 442 penetrating the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the corner portion of the top plate 406 as shown in FIG. In the state where the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position, switching between the working posture and the non-working posture can be performed from the inside of the case member 400.

  Further, in the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5 and 24 and on the lower side of the main substrate 409. Of the upper swash plate 309 (or may be thought of as a horizontally elongated triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409). It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as "temporary holding shelf") at an approximately intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outer side of the rear face plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified based on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c at the lower limit, ie, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range, between the horizontal plane HL passing through the rotation center of H.301b 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing the highest height position of the reels 301a 301b 301c. It can also be rephrased that it is arranged.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of image display comprising at least a liquid crystal display (in addition to this, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc.), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening and closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes to the rear. In the image display body 500, the hinge bracket 420 is attached to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the side plate 404 on the left side of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (refer to the hatched portion in FIG. It is freely supported.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44, a sub-substrate 510 is attached to the back side of the image display body 500. Therefore, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-substrate 510 can be integrally configured, which facilitates handling and can omit the wiring connecting the two, and the wiring work in the case member 400 The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-substrate 510 appears to pop out from the inside of the case member 400, so that the workability with respect to the sub-substrate 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image Display-Hinge Bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. As shown in FIG. In addition, since the hinge fitting 420 has a structure in which the upper and lower sides are symmetrical, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a pivoting member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the pivoting member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a laterally oriented fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the pivoting member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontally oriented bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3 and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. One end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-joint rotational chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed link 420 is a fixed piece 420e facing a certain axial support piece 420f. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), this lever mechanism causes the pivoting trajectory of the image display body 500 to approximate a pivoting trajectory centered on the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front surface member 200. Each pin position is set to That is, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and the rotation outer edge side of the door front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500 even if the rotation position of the door front member 200 changes. The distance to the edge side is made substantially constant.

  Note that overlapping areas 420g and 420h are set so that the long link 420d and the short link 420c overlap vertically in a state where the image display body 500 is rotated approximately 90 degrees (opened) (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d) The region 420g is expanded in a triangular shape so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.) The pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. In the pin holes 420i and 420j, the long link 420d and the short link 420c are connected by coaxially aligning both of them and inserting a rod-like locking pin (not shown), thereby locking the lever mechanism and displaying the image display It is for fixing 500 in the open position.

6-2. Image display body-lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, of the longitudinal reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 11) opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 is locked. The piece 421 is pivotally mounted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 11, the tip of the piece engages with the receiving portion 508 provided on the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state The image display body 500 is locked in the position where the upper part of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 becomes rotatable around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent useless rotation when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, and the image is attached when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100. The lock of the display body 500 is released to be rotatable.

6-3. Image Display-Connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, the case of visually recognizing the inside of the case member 400 or working in the case member 400 In order to avoid this, it is necessary to first open the door-shaped front member 200 on the front side and then open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may cause a reduction in workability or an inconvenience. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the pivoting direction of the image display body 500 is made the same as the pivoting direction of the door-shaped front surface member 200, and the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. It connects by 700 and interlock | cooperates with opening and closing of the door-type front member 200, and it is made to open and close the image display body 500 together. According to this, when the door-shaped front surface member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is moved along with the door-shaped front surface member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one horizontal opening operation.

  Here, as described above, in the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment, the pivoting locus of the image display body 500 corresponds to the rotation axis 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge bracket 420. Although it approximates the turning locus centering on a rotation center, still relative movement arises in movement of both. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the connector 700 of the embodiment, the fixed sheath member 701 is formed on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated freely, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) by the locking shaft 703. is there. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 is opened and closed together as if it is an accessory of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The relative displacement of movement is absorbed by the rod 702 of the connector 700 into and out of the stationary sheath 701.

  The maximum projection length when the rod 702 most protrudes from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is the case where the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, 90 ° open), The distance is set based on the distance between the rotation outer edge (the position of the stop shaft 703) of the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the rotation outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be made the necessary minimum length, and the enlargement of the connector can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is vertically movably mounted on support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and always biased downward by a spring 703a. It is done. Therefore, the retaining shaft 703 can be moved up against the bias of the spring 703a, and by moving it up to float the lower end, the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached or detached. That is, the retaining shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the axial hole portion 702a formed in the tip end portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 is an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the retaining shaft 703 is made of the fixed sheath member 701. It is for holding inside and is engaged with the hook wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the blind movement of the rod 702. On the side surface of the rod 702, a knob piece 706 is provided protruding in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. It is supposed to be. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the tip side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a abuts on the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 is most protruded, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixing sheath member 701.

  Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion provided to project on the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotation outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide portion 402a which inclines downward toward the image display body 500 so as to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. In addition, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (replaceably) mounted on the image display body 500. There is.

  By the way, the relative shift of the movement due to the difference of the rotation locus of the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the image display body 500 can be made a flexible wire other than the above-mentioned expandable rod type connector 700. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, it will hit the image display body 500 which is stopped with the door-shaped front member 200 open at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, impairing the smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, biasing means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 to always bias in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image-displaying member 500 closes by its own force while pulling the connector by the action of the biasing force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image-displaying member 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for bringing the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 together is not limited to the above. For example, hinge fitting 420, which is one element for corotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the lever mechanism as described above, but may be centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. The image display body 500 may be simply rotated.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above so that the image display body 500 can be pivoted in a door-like manner by attaching the image display body 500 to the case member 400 with a hinge structure. When the lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select handling, in which case important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is a finger with the finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443, 443) of the top plate 406 of the case member 400, and the finger passing through the handle opening 422 forms the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can properly use the handle port 422 and the gap 10 according to the location and attitude to be handled. For example, when carrying the case member 400 in the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a hook shape using the handle port 422, while the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. Since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 so that the finger can not enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by putting the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 is projected at the center of the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is held by pushing or pulling the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily put in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with a screw, and thus the lower handle 316 is protruded from the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers substantially the entire area of the opening 401 of the case member 400 above the reinforcing bar 402. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 surrounding a lower portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 from the reinforcing bar 402, that is, the front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control substrate for controlling the light emission source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light emission source and capable of transmitting light. A department is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44).

6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides on the back side of the frame member 501, and the illumination devices 502 illuminate the symbols of the symbol variation display device 300 brightly. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought close to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 in such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light quantity as compared with the conventional lighting device.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 exemplified as the embodiment has a strip-like substrate elongated in a direction (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a...) As shown in FIG. A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LEDs") 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower illumination device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed by a translucent translucent cover plate 505, for example. The upper lighting device 502 is arranged with the LED 504 facing downward in a translucent cover 507 which is, for example, a milky white having a U-shaped cross section.

  The upper illumination device 502 is installed obliquely downward toward the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side from directly below as the illumination direction is shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED attachment surface of the substrate 503 is the above-mentioned so that the center line L (see the enlarged view in FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  If a rod-like light emitting body such as a fluorescent lamp is adopted as a light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 of FIG. 4 is changed to a plate shape or a concave reflecting member for wrapping the light source. The center line of the main irradiation area directed by the total sum of the reflected light may be set to obliquely hit the back surface on the side of the transparent plate 214a. As described above, if the irradiation target of the lighting device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surface of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the circumferential surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a. It has been confirmed that the wide range becomes bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 strikes the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused all over, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated. It is speculated that a wide range of 301b, 301c appears bright or due to their synergy.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can be adopted for the lower illumination device 502, and as a matter of course, as shown in FIG. 32, it can be adopted only for the lower illumination device 502. In FIG. 32, since the upper illumination device 502 of FIG. 4 is disposed at the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed at the upper side, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. Replace "lower" with "upper".

  By the way, when an LED is employed as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) a conventional drive is performed with a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V during operation) Safer than cold cathode tubes, (b) longer life than cold cathode tubes, (c) more durable than cold cathode tubes that are glass tubes, and (d) capable of multi-color light emission; (E) It is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, and thus has a merit that the load on the hinge bracket 420 for supporting the image display 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
The medal release device 110, the power supply device 112, and the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100, for example, the respective input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 And the main substrate 409 etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as "case member side electric component" as a generic name of the electric components on the case member side). Connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable with respect to the outer main body 100, replacement of the model unit 50, etc. In this case, rational wiring means is provided to easily connect or disconnect the main body side electrical component (the housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400, and faces the vacant space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality (two large and small pieces in the embodiment) connector boards housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 It may be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120 and connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 is provided that mates with the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector substrate 123 positioned on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed, movable state so as to be able to move in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. It can move up and down as shown, and can also move in the left and right directions. The small connector substrate 123 is provided with a connector 125 which makes a pair with the connector 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main substrate 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are fixed on a printed circuit board by means of a fixing means such as soldering, and an inexpensive DIN standard is used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 has two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position parallel to the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward of the part.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 which passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or protrudes on the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 side of the outer main body 100 as shown by the one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104 They are respectively connected to the main body side electric parts through wiring openings 109 provided at the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electric component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105 is irrelevant. It is connected as it is.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the wiring means described so far.
(A) Between the horizontal plane passing through the rotation centers of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c on the back plate 405 of the case member 400 The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, the wiring relay member 113 for relaying the main wiring 119 connected to the main electric component and the case wiring 423 connected to the case electric component is installed.
(C) forming a wiring path in the vertical direction passing the wiring along the inner surface of the side plates 102 of the outer main body 100;
(D) Lead the main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 to the side of the case member 400, and connect it to the main body side electric component through the wiring path from there.

  In the gaming machine provided with the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 It is possible to move the reels 301a, 301b and 301c close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in order to bypass the wiring path provided along the side (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)). In the conventional configuration, that is, the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration in which the main-body-side wires 119 pass down the approximate center of the back plate 104 and pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It can be enlarged. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the stronger the force at the time of rotation.

7-2. Wiring means-connector 425, 427]
In the two connectors 124 and 125 provided in the wiring relay member 113 as described above, the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main substrate 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main substrate 409 The connectors 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the electrical components are connected respectively.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 has a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 at substantially the center and projecting to both sides of the holder main body 429; A well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name "NILATCH": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. The attachment piece 431 is placed on the end of the support cylinder 128, and the button-type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as the fixing means and is further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connection between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 is not removed.

7-2-1. Wiring relay board-connector 425, 427-Tack shelf temporarily]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the installation completion Reference numeral 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporarily fixed shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

  The temporarily fixed shelf 418 is a shelf-plate-like member directed from the inside of the case member 400 to the wiring window 411 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12 and 13. As shown in FIG. And the bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433 and three inwardly directed claw pieces 435 and 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , And 435. There is provided a space where the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted between one inward center of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other two upper and lower ones. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and one finger is supported on the finger hook portion 436 and a force is applied in an arrow X direction in FIG. Like the leaf spring, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in such a state that it can be bent outward. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent in a key shape, whereby removal of the connector holder 428 is performed in the sense of pushing a button like arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is the inward claw piece 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434, The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporarily fixed shelf 418 by fitting between 435. Of course, even if temporary fixing is performed, the connector holder 428 is set so as not to come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and thus before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed on the temporarily fixed shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tip of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit parts in the case member 400 and, of course, There is no such thing as damage to oneself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B to FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is warped outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporarily fixed shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its attachment piece 431 abuts on the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 become connectors of the wiring relay member 113. After fitting to 124 and 125 (the details will be described later), the button-type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in to lock the attachment piece 431 on the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5 and FIG. improves.

  As described above, the connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 is stabilized with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base and is separated from the case member and does not contact, so the outer main body Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relative to each other, no undue load is applied.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the explanation so far.
(A) an outer body which is a box-like shape having a front face open and a rear face covered with a back plate, and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components;
(B) A model unit provided with a symbol variation display device or other case member-side electrical components for varying a plurality of symbols in a case member which is detachable from the outer body.
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body in order to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before mounting the model unit to the outer main body (I) A game machine characterized in that the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means in a state where the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above-described gaming machine, attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and coupling of the connectors are separately performed. In contrast, for example, the connector is attached directly to the model unit 50 A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically coupled by an operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100. However, in this method, when a large-sized model unit 50 vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector connection portion, and there is concern about reliability. is there.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a game machine is conceivable in which the door-shaped front member is divided into upper and lower two stages, and the upper door-shaped front member is used as a component on the model unit 50 side. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player excited during the game hits the upper door-type front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector connection portion, which may make the connection of the connector unstable. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with a component (the wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when using a low-cost, general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board, there is no concern about reliability / durability even during transport or during game play. Further, since only the model unit 50 is a target of replacement at the time of model change, and the door type front member 200 is not a target of replacement, the burden on the game arcade for model change is also lightened.

7-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425 and 427 with connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. In this way, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed in one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to the predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a matter of fact, in a structure in which two separate components such as the connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are brought together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes difficult. encounter. That is, if positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not all accurate, collective connection of the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 is impossible. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at mass production cost. One possible means of solving such problems is to use a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing the flexibility of bonding without soldering to a printed circuit board, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Because of this, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 which is a board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired Non-fixedly housed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121, and in the direction orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “perpendicular” is strictly 90 degrees In the social sense, it means about 90 degrees.) It has taken measures to make it possible to move. In this configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is determined for the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector substrate 123 floats and causes the deviation. Because of movement for correction, coupling of the connector 427 and the connector 125 is also possible.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the explanation so far.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each of the connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and also paired with these The connector group is mounted on the connector substrate, and the connector substrate is further divided into connectors, one of which is fixed to the substrate support member, and the other connector substrate is connected to the substrate support member in the connector coupling direction A game machine characterized in that the game machine is mounted so as to be movable in the orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A box with a front open and a back covered by a back plate, and a plurality of symbols on the outer body provided with the power supply and other body-side electrical components, and the case member detachable from the outer body In order to relay the model variation provided with the symbol variation display device and other case component-side electrical components to be varied, the body-side wires connected to the body-side electrical components, and the case-side wires connected to the case member-side electrical components A wire relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wires, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, the connector A fixing means for fixing a holder to the wiring relay member, and a connector which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and fixed to a printed circuit board and used The connector connection includes: another connector group by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and fixed to the connector of the other connector group. The terminal substrate for each connector is divided for each connector, and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other terminal substrate for connector connection is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in the direction orthogonal to the connector connection direction. A game machine characterized by having done so. "
(3) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each of the connectors, one connector group is fixed to the substrate supporting member via the connector substrate. Together with the other connector group paired with these in one connector holder, and further, fix one connector in the connector group to the connector holder and attach the other connector to the connector holder in the coupling direction of the connector and A game machine characterized in that the game machine is mounted so as to be movable in the orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A box is formed with the front open and the back covered by a back plate, and a plurality of designs are attached to the outer body provided with the power supply and other body-side electrical components, and the case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay the model variation provided with the symbol variation display device and other case component-side electrical components to be varied, the body-side wires connected to the body-side electrical components, and the case-side wires connected to the case member-side electrical components A wire relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wires, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, the connector A fixing means for fixing a holder to the wiring relay member, and a connector which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and fixed to a printed circuit board and used The connector holder includes: another connector group by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and fixed to the connector of the other connector group. A game machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connecting direction of the connector. "

  If the above gaming machine aims at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board and operates the connector holder, even if there is a slight deviation due to a manufacturing error or the like in the relative position of the other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal boards move together with the connector and move to correct the deviation and absorb errors, it is possible to connect the connectors not having the joint sight. Therefore, collective connection of a plurality of connectors is possible using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose low-cost connector such as a DIN standard used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body via the wire relaying member and thus the wire relaying member by fixing means such as ny latch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via the flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder . For this reason, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with only the outer body and does not receive interference of the model unit. There is no load on the department at all. Therefore, the connector connection is very reliable.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector substrate 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 can be floated and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are defined as the basis of coupling is the connectors 425 and 124 as compared to the reverse configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily done. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a light force, and automatic correction of the error is easy. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled earlier than the other connectors 427 and 125, whereby the connectors of the combined sight can be easily aligned.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 9, chamfered portions C (c) are formed on the peripheral corner of the tip of the convex portion of the convex connectors 425 and 427 and / or the peripheral corner of the insertion opening of the concave connectors 124 and 125. If linear chamfering or curvilinear chamfering is possible, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered part C makes the connectivity between the connectors better.

  Further, as in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the connector substrates 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 can be made to move freely, it is also possible to make either one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side movable. Also in that case, the same effect as the above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receptacle 429a with an internal thread is protruded from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while an ear piece 427b having free holes 427a is formed on both sides of the connector 427. The play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move relative to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. The connector substrates 122 and 123 in this case may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 12, the back of the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and in the vicinity of both ends of the cable groove 437, wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the back plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 to the main substrate 409 and the like, and the right side face of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 in FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is accommodated in the cable groove 437, and the end of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main substrate 409 or the like. A cable stop 439 is provided at a predetermined interval in the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 does not come off from the cable groove 437.

  The main substrate 409 and the like and the reel substrate 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400 from the first. The reason why the wiring members 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 to divert the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (apparatus case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferred. Conversely, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) and the reel substrate 312 are in close proximity. Because they face each other, a large working space necessary for inserting and removing the connector can not be secured.

  However, on the other hand, if the connection portion of the substrates (main substrate 409, sub substrate 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel substrate 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. , And the cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. As a result, when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, the cable 313 may be caught and conversely, the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the wiring members 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, if the wiring work is performed with the device case 302 pulled out slightly from the predetermined position, the workability is better, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel substrate 312 is the wiring cost There is room to say. Therefore, slack is generated in the cable 313 with the device case 302 set in a predetermined position, and the slack of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of withdrawal. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 can be formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the rear corner portion of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the slack part of

  When the cable groove 437 is expanded toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the space between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 is used. Helps to make effective use of dead space The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 does not have to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in the state of a finished product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game arcade, but at this time the top board 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper crosspiece 600 of the game machine installation island are made of wood screws etc. When it is stopped by the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted from the inside of the case member 400 to the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight portion 443 with a tool 602 such as a driver to fixedly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper crosspiece 600 of the gaming machine installation island. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can select from the inside arbitrarily and can use it as needed. For example, even if there are variations in the position and size of the upper crosspiece 600, the through holes 132 corresponding to the upper crosspiece 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire game machine is replaced, by changing the through holes 132 to be used, it is possible to prevent the problem that the holes of the fixing member 601 are opened at the same position of the upper bar 600 (so-called idiot hole formation).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 etc. is a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. The air passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the air vent 133 of the back plate 104 through the gap S, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, since the wiring relay member 113 exists between the back plate 104 and the case member 400 and acts as a barrier to block the gap S over a wide area, the heat air flowing in the gap S is blocked by this portion. It is actively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Symbol of each reel, symbol row]
Each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 46, is a pattern row configured by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at constant intervals (a total of 21 symbols shown in array numbers 0 to 20 The symbol is attached to the reel band (symbol band). FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows described on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b and 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b and 301c are unfolded in a planar manner. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arranged in the symbol row, the above-mentioned sequence number is indicated for convenience. Further, FIG. 46 shows the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. In the description of the above, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are also described as necessary.

  Then, in each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row are the openings 401 (also referred to as symbol display windows), and the symbols are hereinafter described Are arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401 (see FIG. 47 described next).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols are "7 symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as" 7 symbol red ")," 7 "symbol painted in blue (hereinafter referred to as" "7 blue patterns"), "BAR pattern", "cherry pattern" with cherry pattern, "watermelon pattern with watermelon pattern", "replay pattern", "bell pattern" "Bell symbol" given "," symbol described as "righteousness" (hereinafter referred to as "right symbol"), symbol described as "right" (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol") is there. In addition, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell, the bell design may be divided into a "bell 1 design" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 design" in which two stars are drawn. it can.

  In FIG. 46, “7 symbols of red” are two of the array numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of the array No. 12 in the reel band 321b, and the array No. 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. "Blue 7 pattern" corresponds to one of the arrangement number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement number 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of the array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 2 in the reel band 321c. "Cherry symbol" is one of the arrangement number 10 in the reel band 321a, three arrangement numbers 1 to 14 and 17 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. Two of them correspond. "Replay symbol" is five of the sequence numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, 12, 17 in the reel band 321a, and sequence numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, 11 in the reel band 321b. In the sixteenth and five reel reels 321c, five of the arrangement numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to each other. "BELL 1" is three of SEQ ID NOS: 13, 15, and 18 in Reel Band 321a, and five of SEQ ID NOS: 2, 7, 10, 15, 18, and 18 in Reel Band 321b. The reel band 321c corresponds to three of SEQ ID NOS: 9, 12, and 16. The bell 2 symbol corresponds to three of the arrangement numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two of arrangement numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. The "watermelon pattern" has three of SEQ ID NOS: 9, 14 and 19 in the reel band 321a, two of SEQ ID NOS: 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and SEQ ID NO: 3 in the reel band 321c.・ The 6th, 11th, 20th four correspond. The "design pattern" corresponds to one of the arrangement number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement number 18 in the reel band 321c. The "regular pattern" corresponds to one of the arrangement number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement number 18 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of symbol is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view of the slot machine 1 viewed from the front, centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. Referring to FIG. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed at the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs are provided around the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to "various indicators" described later) Is shown to be placed. Then, a part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 401. In addition, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is disposed above the frame member 501, and it is possible that the image etc. displayed on the image display body 500 (including a moving image) can be viewed from the player. It has become. In the following, each of the above configurations shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

9-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, three consecutive symbols among symbols in the symbol row of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are visible from the symbol display window 401. From the top three positions where this symbol is displayed "upper (or upper position)" (for example, the position where "bell 1 design" of reel 301a is displayed), "middle (or middle position)" (for example, , A position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed, "lower (or lower position)" (for example, a position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display "number of stages x number of reels" symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, nine symbols can be displayed at maximum in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

  Various lamps are provided on the left end (left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401) of the frame member 501 (also referred to as display panel, hereinafter referred to as display panel 501), among which “BET1”, “BET2 The BET lamp (bet lamp) 614 is described as “BET 3”, and the numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers “1, 2 and 3 of the above“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”and“ BET 3 ”) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets and the number according to the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is 1 bet (number of medals bet is 1) and "2" is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), "3" means 3 bets (also referred to as MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  The order that becomes effective is decided according to the bet number. This "valid sequence" is also called a valid line. It is referred to below as a valid line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination to be described later is determined to be displayed as a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if each symbol constituting a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not aligned on any effective line (that is, the predetermined symbol If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned on the activated line), it is not determined that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is not aligned on the effective line, it is determined that disjointed symbol combination modes (that is, combinations of lost symbols) are displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the pay line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, in the normal gaming state (general gaming state) and in the bonus internal state, a game with a three-card game is prescribed or recommended (three prescribed numbers). However, as described later, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the bonus state to be controlled during the bonus game, a two-card game is performed (the prescribed number of two). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are two lines of a straight upward line (right upward line) and a right downward line arrangement (right downward line). Specifically, a line (that is, a line going up to the right) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-design symbol" is displayed in symbol display window 401 in Fig. 47, and "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol Only the two lines of the line (i.e., to the lower right) line 623a in which "is displayed" are regarded as effective lines.

  The bet number and the pay line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line visible to the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped array other than one or a plurality of linear arrays. Further, the number of valid lines is not limited to two, and one or more valid lines may be set. Furthermore, the number of valid lines may be changed in accordance with the number of bet medals in the game.

  The combination of the symbols on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" being displayed on the downward right line 623a which is one of the effective lines. Since the combination of the symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role (replay role), in the next game, the bet is automatically placed without inserting a medal, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It is possible to In addition, even if "BELL 1 symbol-REPLAY symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the effective line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at first glance which combination of symbols has been displayed. However, by displaying the combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” in the middle line which is not the effective line, the player can grasp that the player has won the replay. It should be noted that preparing a combination of symbols that makes it difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance on the activated line but is difficult to grasp the winning combination if looking at the entire symbol display window 401 as in the above-mentioned replay role (replaying combination) The symbol combination may be prepared similarly for other winning combinations. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only with the effective line, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the winning combination of the winning combination when viewed through the entire symbol display window 401.

9-2. Various displays]
As shown in FIG. 47, on the display panel 501, a plurality of indicators such as lamps or LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1 are disposed around the symbol display window 401. There is. Among such a plurality of displays, various displays other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light up (or blinks) when something trouble, failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "error") occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and an error is currently occurring. Is a lamp having a role of informing a player (including a hall clerk etc.). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the error lamp 604, the characters “ERR” are drawn with the error being abbreviated. Since it is difficult to show the details of the error only by lighting up or flashing with the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the error that has occurred in the special display LED 612 separately provided. .

  The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of informing the player that the game can be replayed (playing again without betting on a new medal) when the game result is replayed (described later). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606, the letters “REP” are drawn in short for replay.

  The start lamp 608 starts lighting (or blinks) when the bet number reaches the MAX bet, and has a function to urge the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the start lamp 608, the letters “STR” are drawn in short for the start.

  The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp having a role of prompting the player to bet by continuing lighting (or blinking) until the bet number becomes maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, the character “INS” is drawn in which the insert (the insertion of the game value) is abbreviated.

  When the medals (game value) available to the player are stored by displaying the number of stored medals, the stored number display LED 613 displays the number of medals that can be used by the player due to the insertion of the medals by the player or the payout of medals accompanying the game result. The indicator has a role of informing the player of the number of stored medals, and is constituted by two side by side 7-segment LEDs (the left side indicates the number-of-relays display LED 613a and the right side the number-of-relays display LED 613b). For example, if the upper limit number of medals that can be used by the player is 50, and the upper limit number is stored, "5" is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a, and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying “0”, the stored number of medals “50” is displayed in a distinguishable manner from the player.

  The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) are used to count the number of BETs when betting medals (game value) up to a specified number is performed before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. It is an indicator having a role of notifying the bet number (BET number) of gaming value in one game by displaying, and is constituted by three lamps corresponding to the bet number. Specifically, the BET lamp 614c lights up when the number of BETs is one, and the BET lamp 614b lights in addition to the BET lamp 614c when the number of BETs becomes two, and the upper limit of the number of BETs is three (MAX BET) Then, the BET lamp 614a is turned on, and all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

  It is assumed that the display of these displays described above is controlled by the main substrate 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

  In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game to be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying a cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game or the like, and counting a bonus game are separately provided. It is also good.

  In addition, displays such as the storage quantity display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) are not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as they can display information to be displayed by the display. For example, the number of segments may be a number different from "7" (14 segments or 16 segments), and instead of LEDs, LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, etc. are used. May be

9-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying the number of payouts to inform the player of the number of payouts of the gaming value by displaying the number of payouts when the medals (game value) are paid out according to the game result. It is a display, and is comprised by two side by side 7-segment LED (The special indicator LED 612 a on the left side and the special indicator LED 612 b on the right side). Specifically, two-digit numbers can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, it is timed to be paid out one by one By changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15”, the player can be notified in real time the payout status of the gaming value (medal).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of instructing function display for displaying the content of an instruction by the “instruction function” in the game, apart from the role of displaying the number of payouts. Although the details of the "instruction function" will be described later, in summary, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction by the "instruction function" is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 Information indicating the pressed position and stop order of the reels 301a to 301c (which can be read as the pressing order or pressed position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as an indication function display, and the contents of the display are displayed. When the stop operation of the reel 301 is performed, advantageous game results are provided to the player.

  In the instruction function, the performance affecting the generation of the instruction (specifically, the management of lottery and state transition concerning the instruction function, etc.) is controlled by the main substrate 409, and more specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function Not only the control of the state transition, but also the indication function indication in the special display LED 612 is managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main substrate 409, an instruction of the instruction function with the same contents is also displayed on other display means (for example, the image display 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display. May be displayed, but such display may be controlled by a peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510) other than the main substrate 409. The connection relationship of the special display LED 612, the main substrate 409, and the sub substrate 510 is illustrated in FIG.

  Describing in a specific example, when the push order small combination (one of AT1 to AT10) is selected as the winning combination during the AT game, the push order small combination won under the control of the main substrate 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). The instruction content of “appropriate push order” corresponding to is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, the player can recognize the proper pressing order when interpreting the display content of the indication function display in the special display LED 612. On the other hand, the information similar to the display content of the indication function display in the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510 by a command or the like, and the CPU 1118 of the sub substrate 510 having received the command It is possible to display on the image display body 500 an image indicating “a pressing order”. A specific display example of the indication function display will be described later in [11-3-4].

  In the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform such an indication function display in a mode in which the function is shared by any display in the display panel 501 (in this example, display is made on the special display LED 612 for displaying the number of dispensed sheets). Will be That is, in the special display LED 612, the indication function indication and the number-of-payouts indication are performed. However, for example, by displaying each indication period, the indication can be made without confusion. In the present embodiment, the function of displaying the number of dispensed sheets is also used, but a display having another function may be used, or a display dedicated to display of an indication function may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 is lit to notify the occurrence of an error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. Also has the function of displaying error information. The display timing of the indication function display, the payout amount display, and the error information display will be described later in [11-3-5], [11-3-7], and the like.

[10. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like provided in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main substrate 409 for overall control of the progress of the game, and a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116 and the like are mounted on the main substrate 409. The main board 409 has a function to influence the result of the game (gain of the game value), specifically, for example, the lottery of the winning combination, the bonus, the AT, etc., the control of the game state based on those lottery results, the instruction It manages the decision of the instruction by function and the payout etc. based on the winning combination.

  The slot machine 1 also has a door open detection switch for detecting the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207 as an example of a configuration which is not shown in FIG. The medal selector internal lever detection sensor provided therein, and stop button LEDs (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are provided. These configurations are controlled by the main substrate 409.

  The single-sheet loading buttons 205 and 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main substrate 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, the operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main substrate 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211 b and 211 c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301 a, 301 b and 301 c is outputted to the main substrate 409.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c will be referred to as the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c corresponding to this are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b and a right reel stop button 211c.

  Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates the main substrate 409 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main substrate 409 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include the medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b and 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). The reel drive motor is a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at that time, a plurality of types of symbols continuously from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401 It changes and is displayed.

  In addition, position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c are provided to detect the reference positions for the rotation of the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c are reels on the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. They are provided corresponding to the inside (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). The detection signal (index signal) from these position sensors is input to the main board 409, whereby the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the above-mentioned solenoid 207a and the closing sensor 207b are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a detection signal of the medal to the main substrate 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the insertion sensor 207b is locked out in the medal selector 207 and the insertion of medals can not be accepted, and the medal selector 207 is inserted even if the player inserts medals. The medals which have flowed to the return basket 213 through are returned to the medal receiver 201. At the same time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither bet nor medal storage can be performed by medal insertion.

  The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the medals paid out one by one in the outlet 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. It is done. In addition, the medal storage sensor 111a is provided in the game medal auxiliary storage box 111, and when the number of stored medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the medal exceeds the predetermined quantity is used as a main board Output to 409. At this time, an error display notifying that the medal storage is abnormal is performed by the image display body 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc., and the occurrence of the abnormality in the player or the hall employee etc. is notified (see FIG. It corresponds to "auxiliary storage full error" shown in).

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main substrate 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal emitting device 110. That is, drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341 a, 341 b and 341 c described above are output from the main substrate 409. Further, a drive signal is input from the main substrate 409 to the medal emitting device 110 in accordance with the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal releasing device 110 receives the medal and performs a payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110 or there is no medal at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 110 e is delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, an abnormality signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and the main board 409 receives the fact that the medal payout is abnormal. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display 500, etc. to notify the player or the hall employee etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the "disbursed medal empty error" shown in FIG. Equivalent). Note that the main board 409 and various displays (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, storage number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to these displays via corresponding ports. You can operate lighting and display in

  The slot machine 1 includes a sub substrate 510 as a peripheral substrate different from the main substrate 409. The sub substrate 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124 and an AMP (audio). An amplifier 1126, a sound source IC 1128 and the like are mounted. The sub substrate 510 receives various command signals from the main substrate 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Furthermore, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game arcade through the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid out medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also peripheral boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. In such a case, Various signals can be transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 from various substrates connected to the relay terminal board 131, and can be output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various information on the game managed by the sub substrate 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub substrate 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunction or failure of components of the slot machine 1) It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can only be operated by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112 u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 1 and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112 t when changing the setting. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main substrate 409.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated to stop the corresponding reels 301a, 301b and 301c, and when all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary to In response, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) displayed in the symbol display window 401 corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (symbol combination) has been displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed in the above-mentioned effective line (upper right line 623b and lower right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

  Although two valid lines are described in this example, when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of valid lines, a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of valid lines. It is determined whether the As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals of the number obtained by adding the number of payouts corresponding to the displayed winning combinations are paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit value of the number of medals paid out per one time. In such a case, when the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on a plurality of activated lines exceeds the upper limit value, the predetermined number of medals of the upper limit value is paid out, and the upper limit value is exceeded. Minutes are rounded down. In addition, the excess of the upper limit is not divided and paid out to the next and subsequent games.

  In the following, when the combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one activated line, the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called a winning combination symbol) is The combination is complete, or the winning combination is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 are "7 symbols red", "7 symbols blue", "BAR symbols", "cherry symbols", "replay symbols", "bell 1 symbols", "bell 2 symbols", "watermelon symbols" As mentioned above, there are "design pattern" and "regular design", but among them, "7 symbols of red", "7 symbols of blue" and "BAR symbols" stand out compared to other symbols It is an easy-to-use, easy-to-identify symbol. Here, the ease of identification refers to the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbol during the rotation of the reel and the stopped state of the reel. It is easy to stop these symbols so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because these symbols have their color and size even while the reel is rotating. (Ie, easy to press). Furthermore, as for "art design" and "normal design", as can be seen also in Fig. 46, "justice" can be read in the form of forming a circle with two designs of "right design" and "normal design". As described above, since they are disposed adjacent to each other in the upper and lower direction, and only one reel is disposed in each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, it is easy to be pushed.

  These symbols by themselves are only symbolic symbols (only one symbol does not correspond to a winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, predetermined game benefits are provided. In the following, combination modes of symbols accepted corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

10-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, combinations of winning combinations (including those called winning combinations) of the slot machine 1 and symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50 and 51-53. FIG. 49 shows an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations. The lottery table (also referred to as a hit value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. Although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery of winning combinations, and such a lottery is also called an "internal lottery".

  FIG. 50 is a view showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, which is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. In FIG. 50, a blank in the table means that the condition device with the corresponding condition device number is not activated (OFF), and “1” in the table is with the corresponding condition device number. Condition means that the device operates (ON). 51 to 53 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) showing combinations of symbols corresponding to the respective condition devices and the number of payouts of medals, etc., which are also stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like.

  The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described below is assumed to have an AT (assist time) function using a push order small part, as an example of the function of the gaming machine. The pushing order small part corresponds to the winning combinations of "AT1" to "AT10" shown in FIG. 49, and since the bell symbol alignment can be displayed at the time of winning of these winning roles, "pushing order bell" is also collectively Call. In the gaming machine provided with the AT function, the winning of the AT is determined by the lottery (AT lottery) performed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110), and when the result of the determination is won, the AT game is executed. In the AT game, by teaching or notifying the proper pushing order that can be expected for the payout of the largest number of medals, mainly in the case where the pushing order small part is selected as the winning part in the internal lottery of the winning part, The player who has performed the reel stop operation can obtain many medals. On the other hand, in the game period (non-AT) other than the AT game, medals in the proper push order can be made to be unreliable by not teaching or notifying the push order described above, and each game state The expected acquisition number of medals and the consumption pace of medals can bring differences. Such an AT function is an example of an instruction function provided in the slot machine 1, and the detailed processing and the like will be described later.

  In addition, since the slot machine 1 uses the three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (the stopping order of the reels 301) is "left-middle-right", "left-". There are six ways: right-middle, middle-left-right, middle-right-left, right-left-middle and right-middle-left. In the following description, each pressing order is referred to as "forward pressing", "pinch pressing", "middle pressing", "middle reverse pressing", "reverse pinch pressing", and "reverse pressing". In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the same reel stop control is performed regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in any of the “middle press” and “middle reverse press” order. These two push sequences may be simply referred to as "middle push" without distinction. In this case, substantially, there will be five push sequences.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a procedure of the stop operation for stopping the reel 301, in the case of a game in which the instruction of the pushing order is not given like the period (non-AT) in which the AT game is not performed. , And the left reel 301a is stopped first (that is, the stop operation is performed first to the reel stop button 211a), and "left press (" forward press "or" pin press ") is recommended, and the middle reel 301b or When a stop operation not in line with the recommended procedure is performed by stopping the right reel 301c first or the like, it may be possible to take disadvantageous measures for the player such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery.

  For example, in the case of a winning combination in which the winning combination corresponds to a push order small combination (in this example, a push order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211 a, Depending on the pressing order of 211b and 211c), the aspect of the stoppage eye is different. The difference in the aspect of such a stopping point can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as winning combinations corresponding to "pushing order bell", a plurality of kinds of winning combinations associated with proper pushing order (specifically, "AT1" to "AT10" shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) Correspondingly, when the winning combination is “AT 1”, the forward press (left, middle, right) corresponds to “appropriate pressing order” is prepared, and the combination depending on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is different The operation of a plurality of condition devices (corresponding to the small items shown in FIG. 50) is permitted. At this time, depending on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, under the priority control (for example, "number of sheets priority control" or "symbol combination number priority control") in which the drawing-in control of the symbols at the time of stopping the reels 301 is different. By being set so as to be executed, it is possible to make the mode of the stopped eye different according to the pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to give a difference also to the number of payouts.

  Here, the "number priority control" gives priority to the condition device in which the number of payouts at the time of winning is largest when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, among the "retractable symbols" It refers to the pull-in control which pulls in and stops the symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device concerned on an effective line. Also, with “number of symbol combination priority control”, priority is given to a condition device in which the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by “retractable symbols” is the largest when activation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted. Also, it refers to pull-in control that pulls a symbol corresponding to the condition device on the effective line and stops it.

  Specifically, for example, when “AT1” is selected as the winning combination in which “orderly pressing” is set to “appropriate pressing order”, the condition devices that are permitted to operate are: accessory 1, accessory 4, accessory 6, accessory 7, It is the accessory 9, the accessory 12, the accessory 14, the accessory 15, and the accessory 17 (see FIG. 50). Here, when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is "appropriate pressing order (left, middle, right order)", pull-in control is performed by the above "number priority control", and "inappropriate pressing order" If it is "," it is determined that the pull-in control by the above-mentioned "symbol combination number priority control" is performed. At this time, in the case of “appropriate push order”, the condition device (small item 17) with the 9-piece combination having the largest payout number at the time of winning is prioritized, and the 9-piece combination is drawn onto the effective line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate push order", the condition device (small item 9, small item 12, small item 14, small item 15) or two-piece combination condition of one combination which can display more symbol combinations than the small item 17 The device (small item 1, small item 4, small item 6, small item 7) is given priority, and a combination of one or two pieces of symbols is drawn onto the effective line. Thus, when "AT 1" is selected as the winning combination, when the reel 301 is stopped in the "appropriate pushing order", the nine-prize can be won, while the "improper pushing order" is the reel When 301 is stopped, it is possible to win a combination (one-piece combination, two-sheet combination) in which the number of payouts is smaller than the nine-sheet combination.

  The symbols that can be drawn onto the effective line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211 (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames) Depending on the timing (push timing) of this stop operation, a retractable symbol and a non-retractable symbol are generated depending on the timing of the stop operation. As a result, the mode of the stoppage eye also differs depending on the pressing timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the pressing timing is also set in advance.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the "appropriate push order" is won, the plurality of conditional devices are allowed to operate, and different priority control is performed regarding the pull-in control of the symbols on the reel 301. By setting the, when the game based on the "appropriate push order" is played, a benefit that is more advantageous for the player than when the game based on the "inappropriate push order" is played (for example, comparison Can be stopped at the stopping point where it is possible to give out a large number of medals).

  Further, although not illustrated in FIGS. 49 to 53, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, push order replay as another push order small part. In the following, such push order replay will be briefly described. Strictly speaking, the replay player is not a "small part" because the gaming value is not paid out even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped on the effective line, but is included in the "push order small part" for convenience. . In addition, since the push order replay is one of the replay roles, the symbol combination of any of the replay roles is always on the effective line, regardless of the push order and the pressing position at the time of winning. There is no change in the fact that it is stopped and a replay bonus is given.

  When using push order replay in the slot machine 1, a plurality of winning combination of push order replays are prepared in accordance with the number of push orders as in the case of the push order bell described above, and each push order replay is also selected at the time of winning. Prepare a combination of multiple condition devices that can be actuated. Then, by setting priority control to stop the “specific symbol combination” when the stop operation is performed in “specific push order” for the combination of the plural condition devices, “specified at the time of winning” It is possible to realize a special replay role that "a specific symbol combination can be revealed when a stop operation is performed in the order of pressing", and by the appearance of "a specific symbol combination", the symbol display window 401 is displayed. The stop appearance at can be made a characteristic aspect. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined push order replay is won, “blue 7” is displayed on a predetermined line in the symbol display window 401 only when the stop operation is performed in the “specific push order” of reverse push. It is possible to make it possible to stop "specific symbol combination" in which symbol alignment is displayed.

  As an example of the usage method of such push order replay, when the above-mentioned "specific symbol combination (blue 7 symbol matching within symbol display window 401)" is revealed, a game bonus other than the payout of the game value Will be awarded (as it is a replay role, there is no payout for gaming value). The granting of game benefits specifically includes, for example, the addition of the number of AT games, the transition to an advantageous state, and the like. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player wins the replay in the push order and the above-mentioned game privilege is awarded, the “specific push order” is instructed based on the instruction function to “specify the specific symbol. The player can be notified of a game method that can stop the “combination”, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when the above-mentioned game privilege is not given at the time of winning of push order replay, the stop operation is not performed in the “specific push order” (for example, the stop method other than the “specific push order” is instructed Etc.) is preferable.

  The above is the outline of the push order small part in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the AT game using the above-mentioned push order small part is an example of the special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is the AT game. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be another advantageous gaming state (eg, a bonus game, an ART game, an RT game, etc.). In addition, the AT function is not limited to the AT function using the push order small part, and, for example, the push position small part (a bonus given based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is changed) It may be an AT function or the like using a winning combination).

[10-1-1. Kind of winning combination]
First, the lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared according to the gaming state, and FIG. 49 shows a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state as an example of the gaming state in the slot machine 1. Here, the general state is a normal gaming state in which the bonus game is not in progress and the bonus flag is not established. The bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types of BB described later) is won by internal lottery and a bonus winning state is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state in which transition is made based on the winning of a bonus (specifically, two types of BB described later) by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed. In FIG. 49, two types of BB (type II special feature) are shown as the bonus, but the bonus that can be mounted on the slot machine 1 may be other types, so-called BB bonus, RB A bonus, a single bonus (SB) or the like may be provided. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a gaming state corresponding to each bonus, but the detailed description of each gaming state is omitted since it is the same as a general gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the probability of winning (or the number of winnings) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each gaming state. An internal lottery is performed using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the activated line. Reel stop processing is performed. Then, when any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, the medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to be different depending on the gaming state or the number of medals (prescribed number) of the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since one condition device corresponds to the pattern of reel control on a one-to-one basis, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination. There are also cases where a plurality of conditions are established for one winning combination (see FIG. 50 described later). In this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of stopped symbols (symbol combination displayed on the activated line) for one winning combination.

  The winning combinations shown in FIG. 49 can be roughly classified into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (replay combination), and are called “drops” when none of the above combinations is won. Here, "disapproval" is not strictly a winning combination. However, as in the case where the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, if the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is “missing”, based on the result ( That is, since the subsequent internal processing is set as if the winning combination of "out" has been won, "lower" may be included in the winning combination for the sake of convenience.

  To briefly explain each of them, the "bonus combination" is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, "two types of BB" corresponds to the bonus combination. The "replay role (replay role)" is a role (replay) in which the next game can be executed without re-inserting a medal, and specifically, "replay" corresponds to the replay role. The "small part" is a part in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by the winning, and specifically, "push order bell", "push order no question bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "Weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak chance eyes", "strong chance eyes", and "strongest eyes" correspond to the minor role. As described above, the winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. The reason why the payout numbers of the push order bells are described in a plurality of ways in FIG. 49 is that the payout number may differ depending on the stop order and the stop position of the reels 301. On the other hand, since the winning combinations "BELL 1" and "BELL 2" are bell combinations capable of always stopping the bell symbol regardless of the pressing order, they may be generically called "pushing order unquestioned bell". The details of each winning combination will be described later.

  Also, "missing" means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the winning combination. In the case of "losing", the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the bonus combination status is carried over (ie, the bonus internal status). On the other hand, when the bonus internal state is "off", the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped. However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the lottery table as shown in FIG. 49 is used, the above situation (“off” in the bonus internal state) is set so as not to occur rarely (1 / 65535) In addition, since the winning probability of the "two types of BB" which is the bonus combination is extremely low (1/65535), the opportunity to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination and execute the bonus game is extremely high. Low, most gaming states are controlled to general states or bonus internal states.

  According to FIG. 49, in the general state, there is a possibility that "off" may be selected (15453/65535), but in the bonus internal state and the bonus state, there is little possibility that "off" may be selected. (Each 1/65535). Furthermore, in the bonus state, the winning probability of the pushing order bell is set to be much lower than that in the other gaming states (1/65535), and almost no winning is made. It is set high (32059/65535). In the case of the pushing order unquestioned bell, nine sheets are paid out regardless of the pushing order, but when the pushing order bell is improper pushing order, only two or less sheets are paid out. Therefore, by performing distribution in this way, when being controlled to the bonus state (bonus game), it is possible to increase the player's hand-held medals without substantially reducing it.

  In addition, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "off", even if one of the combinations (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination) is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination is executed the pull-in control described later Aims to stop in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within the possible range and stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at appropriate timing (pushing position) If this is not done, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can not be displayed on the activated line. Therefore, even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the effective line, the same as when "off" is selected, In step S6 of FIG. 54, it is determined that the game result is a loss. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when a game result is lost despite winning a winning combination, the symbol combination of “off” is not displayed randomly, but the winning A control is made to display a predetermined symbol combination (stopping point) indicating that the winning is based on the winning combination in the symbol display area. And the thing of the symbol combination (stopping eyes) displayed at the time of such a loss is called "a zeroing (or zeroing)" below.

  Further, in the description of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expression "bell zeroing (bell zeroing)" is used with respect to "pushing order bell (AT1 to AT10)". “Bell Zero” means that when the winning order is determined in which the proper pressing order has been determined for each winning combination, the stopping operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order, so that the bell alignment (strictly speaking, nine pieces of It means that another symbol combination in which the role of the bell is removed is displayed without stopping the symbol combination of the symbol of the bell, which can be paid out. In such a case, the bell zero mark is displayed as the stop point, and a payout (including no payout) less than the original bell alignment is made. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device numbers 1 to 32 in FIG. 51 is a symbol combination of bell zero, and at this time, the number of payouts of one or two is set. As described above, the "bell zeroing" is different from the above-described "zeroing" at the time of losing.

  Further, in the description related to the present embodiment, the expression “separate” may be used in addition to the above “zeros”. “Discrete eyes” is not a “matched eye” that makes it easy for the player to easily recognize the characteristics of the stopped eyes, but a stopped eye (a so-called so-called disjointed symbol) It means that it is a "broken eye"). That is, since the "broken line" is one of the divisions regarding the display mode of the symbol combination, and even the broken line is not necessarily a loss, medals may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning combination]
The winning combinations illustrated in FIG. 49 are winning combinations (separate roles) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity. When the single winning combination is won, the later reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1, a winning combination (simultaneous winning combination) may be prepared such that a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected. Such simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity, for example, when a plurality of small winning combinations (for example, a plurality of bell combinations) are simultaneously selected, A bonus role and a minor role may be selected at the same time.

  When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, the later reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition device based on each of the winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. And, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority (for example, priority such as "replay> small part> bonus", "replay> bonus> small part") In accordance with the above, while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, the reel stop processing is performed, and the payout of the privilege according to the winning combination is performed. In addition, depending on the specification of the gaming machine, the combination of the small winning combination, the setting method of the effective line, etc., control may be performed such that the simultaneous winning combination is won together, and when simultaneous winning occurs, Disbursement of the privilege according to the winning combination of is performed. In any case, the small part is a "non-takeover part" that can only be won in the winning game, and the winning state of the winning part that can not be won in the winning game is not carried over to the next game. Even if the winning combination of the combination is selected, the medals corresponding to the small combination are not paid out to the small combination that could not be won in the winning game.

  Further, in the case where the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a double combination. Even when the bonus combination and the small combination are won simultaneously, the condition devices corresponding to the respective combination combinations are activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous combination of the small combination, and predetermined priorities (for example, Reel stop processing is performed while display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted in accordance with the priority such as “play> small win> bonus” and “replay> bonus> small win”, and according to the winning combination Payouts will be made. However, as for the bonus combination, as described above, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game, the winning combination status of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. Can be considered as a “possession role”. Specifically, two types of BB are "possessions". Also, the replay role and the minor role (for example, the bell role) are "non-possession role". As described above, even when the "possession hand" and the "non-possession hand" simultaneously win due to the winning combination, the display control of which symbol combination is permitted is controlled by the reel stop processing. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "possession hand" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of the "possession hand" is carried over to the next game and thereafter. However, in such a “next game”, when another small winning combination is won, both “preceding role” and “another small winning combination” are established, but in this case, Since they are selected at different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

  In the case of simultaneous wins, it is determined based on the setting of the priority in the reel stop processing that which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be preferentially displayed on the activated line.

  Hereinafter, the winning combinations roughly classified above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

[10-1-3. Bonus role]
The winning combination “two types BB” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination relating to the second kind special feature. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, reel stop processing is performed, and a privilege is awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a symbol combination ("Red 7" aligned) corresponding to the condition device "BB1" is displayed on the effective line, whereby a bonus game (BB game) of two types of BB is executed. This bonus game is a game provided with an opportunity for the player to obtain medals intensively over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is set to two and shown in the bonus state of FIG. 49. The bonus game is advanced using the selected lottery table. Then, the bonus game is ended when the number of bonus games has passed a specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or the total number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state.

  Here, the symbol combinations ("Red 7" match) corresponding to "2 types of BB" are arranged not necessarily drawn on the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 46). However, "two types of BB" is a carryover player capable of carrying over the winning flag, and even if the "red 7" assortment corresponding to the symbol combination in the winning game is not displayed (not aligned), The game is played as a bonus internal state until the winning establishment state is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

  And, when being controlled to the bonus internal state, if the player wins a replay role or a small role as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is “replay (replay combination)> small part> bonus”, and at this time, even if the establishment status of two types of BB is maintained as the bonus internal status, the two types of BB The opportunity to display the symbol combination is limited to the case that the player has not won the replay role or the small role in the internal lottery (that is, the game is lost). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the rate of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65535). Therefore, in most games, there is no opportunity for the symbol combination of 2 types of BB to be displayed, and the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-4. Role of Replay]
The winning combination “Replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (replay role). When the replay role is won, the condition device for replay (refer to FIG. 50, replay 1) is activated, and the effective line (any one of the lines 623a and 623b) permits stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role. Based on this, a reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54) described later is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay combination is always displayed on the effective line, and it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is complete, and as a result, as a benefit of the replay combination. In the next game, bets are automatically made without inserting medals or performing a bet operation (operation for inserting stored medals) again, and it becomes possible to play again the same game as the previous game. Even if the symbol combination of replay is displayed on the effective line, the medal as a prize is not paid out.

  The feature of the game benefits of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume new medals (put new medals) in the next game instead of not paying out medals. Further, since the replay is a winning combination not accompanied by the payout of medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, the disadvantage for the hall is small even if the winning frequency becomes high. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning approximately once in six to seven times is set. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain fixed range. That is, it is possible to give the winning combination "Replay" a role of suppressing the consumption of excessive medals in the progress of the game.

  In addition, each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c uniformly arranges the symbols constituting the combination aspect of the symbols corresponding to the replay role (for example, the symbols constituting the combination aspect of the symbols corresponding to the replay role and the same replay role) By making one to at most four other symbols (symbols that do not constitute the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role) between the symbols that constitute the combination of the corresponding symbols The combination pattern of the symbols corresponding to the replay role can be made uniform without the need for a look. In such a case, if the priority of the displayed winning combination is "replay (replay combination)> small combination> bonus", temporarily the condition device of the replay combination and the other combination (small combination or bonus combination) Even if the condition device operates at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is always displayed stopped, and the symbol combinations corresponding to other roles are not displayed stopped.

[10-1-5. Role of Bell]
Next, the Bell role as a winning combination will be described. The bell combination is a winning combination in which payout of medals can be expected at the time of winning. Several types of bells are prepared in this embodiment, and an example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-5-1. Push order unquestioned bell]
First, a push order unquestioned bell (common bell) in which the degree of winning at the time of winning (the win rate and the number of medals paid out based on the win) does not change according to the pushing order of the reels 301 will be described.

  The specific winning combinations of the "pushing order unquestioned bell" shown in FIG. 49 are "Bell 1" and "Bell 2" shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, when “BELL 1” is selected as the winning combination, the condition device of accessory 17 is activated, and when “BELL 2” is selected as the winning combination, the components of accessory 17 and accessory 18 are selected. Condition device operates. Here, the condition device for the small item 17 and the small item 18 is configured such that any corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the effective line regardless of the pushing order and pushing timing of the reel (see FIG. 51 etc.) . Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, the bell combination is won by the symbol combination of the bell combination being stopped regardless of the stop order and the stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, and the prize is won The payout (9 sheets) of the medal according to is given as a privilege.

  Referring to FIG. 49, in the general state and the bonus internal state, the winning probability of “BELL 1” and “BELL 2” is relatively low and can be included in the “low winning combination (rare)” described later. On the other hand, in the bonus state, since "bell 1" or "bell 2" is won with a probability of about 50%, it becomes one of the main winning combinations in the bonus game.

  In addition, "Bell 1" and "Bell 2" are distinguished as strong or weak depending on the degree of expectation to the privilege that can be given at the time of each winning. The benefit may be, for example, an expectation for AT (a winning of AT, a winning probability for AT game, etc.) or an expectation for a transition between gaming states such as a low probability state or a high probability state. Specifically, "Bell 2", which has a lower winning probability, is a strong bell, and "Bell 1", which has a higher winning probability than "Bell 2", is a weak bell.

[10-1-5-2. Push order bell]
Next, a push order bell will be described in which the degree of winning at the time of winning (the win rate and the number of medals paid out based on the win) can be changed depending on the order of pushing the reels 301.

  The winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 are mainly winning combinations of push bells prepared in order to be able to surely give a bonus to the player in the AT game. Each of “AT1” to “AT10” is associated with any one of five proper pushing orders (see FIG. 50).

  In FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are equal to one another, and when they are summed up, the winning probability of “push order bell” is 32000/65535, but “AT1” to “AT10” Each winning probability may be distributed arbitrarily under the condition that satisfies the above-mentioned total value. In this way, the winning probability can be equally distributed with respect to the five proper push orders (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse pinch push) in the "push order bell" (each win probability of 5 choice bells) Can be equal to each other, and a specific push order can be made difficult to be selected in an appropriate push order. Specifically, for example, the winning probability of “AT1” to “AT4” in which the left reel 301a is selected as the first stop reel as the proper pushing order is 2000/65535, and other than the left reel 301a (medium Assuming that each winning probability of "AT5" to "AT10" in which the reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is selected as the first stop reel is 4000/65535, pressing the left reel 301a as the first stop reel in the proper pushing order The winning ratio of the forward bell can be significantly lower than the winning ratio of the push order bell in which the middle reel 301 b or the right reel 301 c is set as the first stop reel of the proper push order. In such a case, in the normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a first, it is possible to suppress the winning ratio of the bell in order of pushing, and the AT game etc. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game of.

  As shown in FIG. 50, when “AT1” to “AT10” are selected as winning combinations, a plurality of condition devices of small items 1 to 16 and a condition device of small items 17 and small items 24 to 26 The condition device of 0 to 2 operates at the same time. The symbol combinations and the like corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53. The small items 1 to 16 are condition devices corresponding to the symbol combination (one or two payouts) of “Bell Zero,” and the small item 17 is a symbol combination of “Bell role” (nine Condition device corresponding to the payout). Also, the accessory 24 to the accessory 26 are originally condition devices for weak and strong chance eyes described later, and when the bell is won, even if it is activated, its priority is higher than that of other activated condition devices. Also by keeping it low, the symbol combination corresponding to the accessory 24 to the accessory 26 is not actually stopped.

  Then, different priority control is set for draw-in control of symbols based on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) in the player's stop operation for the plurality of condition devices operating simultaneously. By this, it is possible to display different stop numbers with the proper push order and the push order that is not so (incorrect push order). That is, while the stop operation is being performed on the reel stop button 211 in an appropriate pressing order (for example, in the case of AT1) corresponding to the winning combination, the small item 17 is selected based on the above-mentioned "number priority control". When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the proper pushing order until the end, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped on the effective line and nine medals are paid out as a bonus it can. On the other hand, when the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is performed in an improper pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device other than the small item 17 is stopped based on the above-mentioned "symbol combination number priority control" Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 17 is not stopped on the effective line, and the symbol combination of the bell zero will be stopped on the effective line, and the privilege (1 or 2 as the bell zero) A medal payout is given.

  According to FIG. 50, “AT1” and “AT2” are the winning combinations of the push order small combination in which the forward push is the proper push order, and “AT3” and “AT4” are the push order in the proper push order. "AT5" and "AT6" are the winning combinations of "pushing order" in which the middle pushing is the proper pushing order, and "AT7" and "AT8" are the pushing back. “AT 9” and “AT 10” are winning combinations of a push order small combination in which the reverse pinching is set to the proper push order. Therefore, in the case of using FIG. 50, the “pushing order bell” in the present embodiment is a so-called “5” in which the proper pushing order is divided into five (forward pushing, pinch pushing, middle pushing, reverse pushing, reverse pinch pushing). It becomes a selection bell. Of course, such an appropriate push order setting can be freely set within predetermined limits at the design stage of the gaming machine, for example, even if it is a 3-choice bell based only on the first stop reel. There may be six alternative bells based on the first stop reel and the second stop reel.

  As described above, "AT 1" to "AT 10" in the push order bell are winning combinations in which nine medal payouts as winning in the bell combination are received only when the stop operation is performed in the proper push order. Yes, it is a winning combination to be awarded a bonus (one or two medals paid out) less than at the time of winning the bell combination as "bell zeroing" when the stop operation is performed in an incorrect push order .

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the non-AT state which is not the AT state, the left push (forward push or pinch) is recommended. Therefore, when the game according to the recommended procedure is performed in the non-AT state, a winning order bell (specifically, AT5 to AT10) has been won, in which other than left pressing (forward pressing or pinch pressing) is an appropriate pressing order. Even so, I can not win the Bell role. However, in the AT state, the proper pushing order is taught, and by allowing the stop operation according to the contents of the instruction, it is possible to easily win the bell combination when the pushing order is won. If the player performs a stop operation different from the recommended procedure and obtains medals unfairly at the time of non-AT, by taking measures such as temporary stop of AT lottery, overall medal payout will be made. The expected value of may be properly adjusted.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, as described above, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pushing order. For example, the player may perform the stop operation in any push order when a specific push order is not set as a recommended procedure except when instructed by an instruction function such as AT, and in such a case, Because the recommended procedure does not exist, adjustment (measures such as temporary suspension of AT lottery) of "If you made a stop operation different from the recommended procedure and get the medal unfairly" as mentioned above is also unnecessary. Become. In addition, when not specifying a specific pushing order as a recommended procedure, it is more desirable to make the winning probability for each pushing order in the pushing order small part the same. By equalizing the winning probability for each push order, the expectation value of the balls can be equalized regardless of which push order is played, so that the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind in the preferred push order. it can.

[10-1-6. Role of Cherry]
Next, the cherry role as a winning combination will be described. The cherry combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two pieces) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of cherry roles, weak cherry and strong cherry, are prepared. The weak cherries and the strong cherries are provided with strong / weak differences mainly in their expectations for AT (AT winning, AT game winning probability, etc.) (details will be described later in the AT description).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the condition device of the accessory 19 and the accessory 20 is activated when the "weak cherry" is selected, and the condition device of the accessory 19 to the accessory 21 is activated when the "strong cherry" is elected (each condition device See FIG. 52 for the symbol combination etc. corresponding to. Although detailed explanation is omitted about operation of the condition device when each winning combination is chosen, when the symbol combination based on accessory 19 and accessory 20 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, weak cherry or strong cherry When it is known that any of the cherries has won, and the symbol combination based on the accessory 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is known that the strong cherries have been won.

[10-1-7. Role of watermelon]
Next, the watermelon role as a winning combination will be described. The watermelon combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (five pieces) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of watermelon roles, weak watermelon and strong watermelon, are prepared. The weak watermelon and the strong watermelon are mainly provided with a difference between strong and weak depending on the degree of expectation for AT (such as winning of AT and probability of winning for AT game) (details will be described later in the description of AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when "weak watermelon" is won, the condition device of accessory 22 operates, and when "strong watermelon" is won, the condition device of accessory 22 and accessory 23 operates (corresponding to each condition device Refer to FIG. 53) for the symbol combination and the like. Although the detailed description of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, when the symbol combination based on the accessory 22 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, either weak watermelon or strong watermelon is selected. When it is known that a prize has been won, and the symbol combination based on the accessory 23 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is known that a strong watermelon has been won. Supplementally, when the weak watermelon is won, there is a possibility that the watermelon pattern is aligned on the upper right line or the lower right line and stopped, and when the stronger watermelon is elected, the watermelon pattern may be aligned on the middle line and stopped. is there.

[10-1-8. Role of chance]
Next, the chance role as a winning combination will be described. The winning combination is a winning combination in which payout of medals (one sheet) can be expected upon winning. In the present embodiment, two types of chance roles are prepared: weak chance eyes and strong chance eyes. There are strong and weak differences between the weak and strong chances mainly in the degree of expectation regarding the AT (the AT winning, the winning probability regarding the AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description regarding the AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the condition device of the accessory 24 is activated when the "weak chance" is won, and the condition devices of the accessories 25 and 26 are activated when the "strong chance" is elected (each condition device Refer to FIG. 53 for the corresponding symbol combinations and the like. Although detailed explanation is omitted about the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is chosen, when the symbol combination based on the accessory 24 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, winning in the weak chance is won When the symbol combination based on the small item 25 and the small item 26 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is known that the player has won a strong chance.

[10-1-9. Strongest eyes]
Next, the strongest eye as a winning combination will be described. The strongest eye is a winning combination that can be expected to be paid out (one sheet) at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 50, at the time of winning the “strongest eye”, the condition device of the accessory 27 is activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the small item 27 can not be stopped unless the reel stop button 211 is operated at an appropriate pressing timing because of the arrangement of its constituent symbols, but the strongest eye can be obtained by operating the appropriate pressing timing. When winning, the "positive" symbol is displayed in line on the middle line.

  Note that the winning probability of the strongest eye is set to an extremely low probability of 1/65535 (see FIG. 49) in any of the gaming states, and can be positioned as a so-called premier role. And when winning such a Premier combination, freeze control may be added at the time of rotation control of the reel 301, etc. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the special winning combination has been won. , Can increase the player's interest.

  The above is the combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

  In addition, these symbols are not limited to the combination aspect of the symbol and symbol which were demonstrated above. Also, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, a plurality of kinds of symbols can be newly provided. And, it is possible to further increase or decrease the types of winning combinations. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not limited to the provision of all of the winning combinations, but may be selected as needed.

  For example, duplicate winning combinations of a bonus combination and a small combination (or replay combination) may be set. A reel stop process controls which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed on the activated line when winning such a winning combination.

  Also, instead of the push order small part prepared for the AT game, a push position small part may be prepared. Although a detailed description will be omitted, the push position small combination means when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and when the stop operation is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. , Is a small role showing different winning modes. In the case of mounting such a push position small winning combination, at the time of winning of the push position small winning combination, by performing a teaching or notification such that the player can easily recognize the proper push position in the AT game. The player can easily win a response role, and can obtain many medals.

  It should be noted that the player of the slot machine 1 is based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 47), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts thereof (FIG. 51 to 53), the arrangement of symbols (FIG. 46), etc. In some cases, it is possible to find a gaming method that can expect the maximum payout in a situation where it is not possible to know the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. Hereinafter, such a game method is temporarily referred to as "maximum efficiency batting method". When playing a game with maximum efficiency batting, depending on the stop position of the reel, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination with the largest number of payouts on the effective line (watermelon combination, cherry combination) , Etc.), the reel stop button 211 is pressed at a specific timing that maximizes the expected payout, taking into consideration the winning probability and the number of payouts. By pressing the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol aspect, symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn in and a large number of payouts are obtained. In other words, the maximum efficiency hitting method can be said to be a gaming method that minimizes the loss of the winning combination.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of the game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

  FIG. 54 shows one basic game processing procedure in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, an initial setting for preparing for a game start is performed. In particular, when starting up the power supply, check the connection and operation status of the above-mentioned various devices, check the presence or absence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before power-off. Run. If backup data does not exist, predetermined processing such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

  In the next step S2, the bet number is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or one-sheet insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet number of one game is determined, and the BET processing is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. In the case where the slot machine 1 is a three-sheet-only machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals, the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, an internal lottery process is performed to start the game by operating the start lever 210, which is in the operation waiting state in step S2, and to determine whether any winning combination is to be the result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either at the stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that start rotation in the subsequent step S4 are in the stop state (stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed in order to decide whether it is decided that the winning combination of is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any of the winning combinations, when the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the effective line. It is acceptable to stop.

  Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the instruction function of the AT (so-called AT navigation). In the indication function processing, the transition to a precursor game in which a precursor effect is executed regarding a precursor effect that suggests or teaches whether or not an AT game is started, as well as the winning of the AT game and the start thereof and the like is determined. The like is also determined, and if the AT game is in progress, AT navigation is performed to teach the player the pressing order and the like. Details of the instruction function process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command function process of this example, central control related to the AT function including a sign of AT game (lottery of winning AT, determination of the number of AT games, execution of AT game, transition of gaming state, display of command function, etc.) Is managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, auxiliary control (such as navigation display on the image display 500) regarding the AT function is managed by the sub-substrate 510, but even in such a case, navigation that the sub-substrate 510 is displayed on the image display 500 etc. The display contents of the display are limited to those according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the main board 409 determines the content of an instruction by the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) based on the winning combination in the game. In addition, the display content of the indication function display controlled by the main substrate 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display content of the navigation display controlled by the sub substrate 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 etc. The correspondence relationship of 1 is not limited, and the correspondence relationship of 1 to n (a plurality of patterns) may be employed. That is, when some indication function display is performed by the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub-board 510 executes navigation display in a display mode corresponding to the indication function display with respect to navigation display on the image display 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display does not have to be limited to one type, and even if the navigation display is performed in any of the display modes among the plurality of display modes corresponding to the indication function display Good. In such a case, the sub-substrate 510 may determine whether to display the navigation in which display mode, or the main substrate 409 may specify. In addition, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main substrate 409 may perform all the processes related to the instruction function process.

  Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in the present example, it is assumed that the process content regarding the instruction function of the AT is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. In addition, it is preferable that the instruction function process end before the reel rotation process of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process is performed to start rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in accordance with the end of the internal lottery process of step S3. In this reel rotation process, when rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c become valid. While turning on the operation effective lamp (not shown) to notify that the timer has been started, timer counting is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation effective lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c.

  In step S5, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c while turning off the operation valid lamp in response to the depression operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c by the player is received. Run.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state, whether or not the winning combinations are aligned on the "effective line" (a symbol corresponding to any winning combination is Based on whether or not the combination mode is displayed, a determination process is performed to determine the winning combination. Specifically, by collating "display content (combination pattern of symbols) displayed on the effective line" with "symbol combination permitted to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination". Determine the winning combination. Moreover, you may make it determine based on "the display content (combination aspect of the symbol) displayed on the effective line" as determination processing of step S6. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the line (falling downward line 623a) on which "BELL 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" shown in FIG. 47 is displayed, and "BAR symbol-Replay symbol-Definition" Two lines of the line (upper right line 623b) on which the symbol is displayed are referred to as "effective lines".

  In step S7, a payout process of medals is executed based on the content of the game bonus corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S6. In addition, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination accompanied by a change in gaming state such as two types of BB, each change in gaming state (change in gaming state shown in FIG. 49) or replay Etc. to grant various game benefits.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process) to step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed internal processes triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively called start process. The specific description of this start-up process is given below.

[11. Startup process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

  In the start-up process, first, at step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. When the MAX bet operation or the medal input is made, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S102. In addition, this determination is the insertion of the medal corresponding to the MAX bet (that is, the insertion of three or more medals in the case of the specified number of three games, the insertion of two or more medals in the case of the specified two numbers of games) It is assumed that the condition is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206, which results in the MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the prescribed number is three, two lines of the right upward line 623b and the right downward line 623a become effective lines, and indicate this. Turn on the effective line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation is awaited until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in this case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is activated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  In addition, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied while the player does not perform the bet operation or the medal insertion in the above-described step S101 or the MAX bet is not reached, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied either, and the process returns to step S101 and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Also, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This is automatically put into the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thus, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After extracting the random number, the process proceeds to the next step S107. The timing for extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the operation of the start lever 210, or in the process of programming, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, it is determined on the basis of the extracted random number (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number) that a winning combination (collation of random numbers) is determined. In this hit determination, the extracted random value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The matching of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches, matches) to the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). The winning probability for each winning combination in the win determination performed by collating the extracted random value with the win determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag processing, when the hit value determination table to be the determination reference is determined when the extracted random number values are compared in the game, the game state flag such as the BB game in-progress flag described later is referred to A hit value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (playing state flag) in the ON (= 1) state in the game is set to collate the extracted random number values. It is assumed that the game state flag has a flag corresponding to the game state, and has, for example, a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal middle flag and the bonus middle flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always set in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, it is a "loss" that does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, and no condition device is activated (see FIG. 50) ). Here, when any one of the condition devices is ON (when activated or satisfied), it is possible to arrange symbol combinations corresponding to the satisfied condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices are established, the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations can not be aligned on the effective line. The above steps S106 and S107 are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random number to the flag process corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 55, this instruction function process may be executed as part of the flag process of step S107 of FIG. 55, or after the flag process of step S107 is completed, step S108. The wait timer may be executed before time-up.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when flag processing or instruction function processing is executed, a group of condition devices whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination, instruction contents of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main substrate 409 side is notified from the main substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). The command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command collected as appropriate.

  Further, as a command transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) as a result of the instruction function processing being performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following command mode can be adopted. . That is, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on their types (such as Bell, Replay, Rare, etc.) and pressing order (order pressing, middle pressing, pressing order unquestioned, etc.), etc. On the other hand, the command can be transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510) in a form capable of identifying the group including the winning combination. The classification standard in grouping of winning combinations is not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the presence or absence of push order is added to the classification criteria, all bells included in the push order bell (AT1 to AT10) are grouped into one group, and the bells included in the push order bell (bell 1, bell 2) The bell part can be divided into groups according to the presence or absence of pushing order by making) into another group. At this time, the bell part is divided into a push order bell group and a push order unmatched bell group. Further, the same applies to the replay role, and for example, it may be divided into a push-order replay group and a normal replay group (push-order unquestioned). Also, all the winning combinations may be grouped by pressing only or not. In such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a pressing order group or a non-pushing order group. Further, instead of grouping winning combinations, conditional devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. Hereinafter, commands for notifying such grouped winning combinations will be described in more detail.

  First, with regard to command transmission for notifying grouped winning combinations, when an instruction function display is executed, a command in which all breakdowns of the grouped winning combinations are known (so-called, command capable of "complete navigation") May be sent. At this time, since the sub-substrate 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what kind of combination and in what order the selected winning combination is, the reel stop method advantageous to the player It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") which can certainly teach.

  In addition, with regard to command transmission for notifying grouped winning combinations, when the indication function display is executed, a command (for example, only the first stop can be taught so that a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combinations can be understood) "Partial navigation" may be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-substrate 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of information regarding the selected winning combination, a navigation display that can partially teach a reel stop method advantageous to the player (for example, only the first stop) So-called “partial navigation” can be displayed.

  In addition, when the command function display is not executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combinations, a command may be transmitted such that the breakdown of the grouped winning combinations is not known. At this time, the sub board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is the winning combination included in the group or the executability of the indication function display based on the group indicated by the command. , Can not recognize more information. For example, although it is understood that the winning combination is any of the pushing order bells, the breakdown of the proper pushing order and the specific winning combination (which of the “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) It can be recognized to the extent that it does not understand. A command to notify the grouped winning combination when such an indication function display is not executed may be considered as a "condition device command" described later with FIG.

  Furthermore, when the indication function display is executed, the small roles to be grouped need not be limited to pushing order bells, but may be grouped including other roles (for example, pushing order bell and pushing order replay). You may do so. That is, in this case, even if the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or the push order replay is selected, a command indicating the same group is transmitted if the proper push order is the same. Means In addition, even when the indication function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the push order bell, but to group other roles (for example, push order bell and push order replay) to be grouped In such a case, the type of the winning combination (replay or bell) can not be determined on the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that has received the command, and the indication function display Since the player can not teach the winning combination in a non-related state (for example, if the instruction function is not executed, a replay navigation indicating that the replay is won can not be displayed on the image display body 500, etc.) It is more desirable to send commands by grouping them by type of push order small part, such as making the push order replay separate and separate.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command to notify the grouped winning combinations grouped in this way, and the peripheral substrate side can independently win the winning combinations and the winning combinations thereof. It is possible to suppress the determination of the pushing order.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game concerned) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called the weight timer measures the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from when the rotation of the reel is started in the game to when the rotation of the reel is started in the next game. It is a thing. Here, if the wait timer times up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the speed of rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation effective lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started to rotate are kept rotating at the above-mentioned constant speed until the player's stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c) is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start processing, and the start processing ends.

11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is permitted as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the game. Here, when the corresponding winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is operated, and the information of the operated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (the reel stop processing, It will be reflected in judgment processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is called an extraction range) at the time of random number extraction is determined in advance. The extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 14 = 16384 random numbers) or the like. In the first embodiment, the random numbers in the extraction range are from 1 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. When the random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased by that amount, so it is less likely that a specific random value will be extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random number values corresponding to the respective winning combinations are assigned in advance. For example, among the random number values in the extraction range (from “1” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment), the random number value corresponding to the winning combination “2 types BB” is “1”. If the extracted random number value is "1", the result of the internal lottery is "2 types of BB won", and BB1 which is a condition device of 2 types of BB is processed as an information command in the game. It will be done. In addition, using this, it is possible to calculate the winning probability of 2 types of BB (probability of selecting 2 types of BB as a result of internal lottery, lottery probability) from random numbers corresponding to the extraction range and 2 types of BB. . In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of the two types of BB in the general state is 2 because [the total number of random number values corresponding to the two types of BB / the total number of random number values within the extraction range] is 6553/65535. The probability of winning the species BB is about 1/10.

  As described above, corresponding random numbers are determined for all the winning combinations, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (two types of BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is a winning value corresponding to the two types of BB. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, if, for example, the winning value of a predetermined combination is set to consecutive random number values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, the winning combination of this predetermined combination The range of values is from random number "1" to "4". Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (collated), it means that “the predetermined winning combination has been won” as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, single roles (for example, two types of BB, cherry, replay, etc.) for winning only one winning combination are prepared. As described above, in addition to such a single role, a simultaneous winning combination (including a "double winning combination" in which a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously winning) in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously elected may be prepared. And when preparing such a duplicate combination, the winning combination of the double combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

  From this, the range of winning values is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined in the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning values of any of the winning combinations, it means a loss. That is, the range of the winnings for the loss is outside the range of the winnings for all the winning combinations. The winning value may also be called a winning tolerance value.

  By the way, a single winning combination means that one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random value, and a simultaneous winning combination means a plurality of (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Is the corresponding one. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations is won. At this time, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination of a plurality of winning combinations is simultaneously established (operation is permitted). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, in fact, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices It is not always possible to stop on the effective line. For example, when the replay role and the bonus role are simultaneously won, if priority is given to the retraction of the replay role, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed to give priority to the retraction of the replay role. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order or the pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can not be stopped on the active line, and always the replay role The symbol combination of will be stopped.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, push order unquestioned bells (bell 1, bell 2) and replay hit values at which the winning (or establishment) can be expected without depending on the pressing timing and pressing order in the stop operation are extracted. Occupies the majority of the range. Specifically, among the total lottery values of extraction range of 65535, since the lottery value to be assigned to replay is 30993, and the lottery values to be assigned to the push order non-interrogation bell is 32059, the total is 63052, and the extraction range is Account for over 96% of In the first embodiment, the prescribed number in the bonus is two, and when the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming the medal, and when the push order unquestioned bell is won, nine sheets The medal is paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals will be paid out during the execution period of the bonus game (during the bonus).

11-3. Control processing of gaming state]
The control processing of the gaming state performed in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main substrate 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not the bonus game (BB game) is in progress (step S151). If it is determined that the bonus game is in progress (YES in step S151), whether the termination condition of the bonus game is satisfied It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S152). If the ending condition of the bonus game is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the process returns while the gaming state in the bonus is maintained.

  When the ending condition of the bonus game is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the state is shifted to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when the game is performed for a predetermined period, the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game in the predetermined period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB game) is not in progress (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus internal state (bonus internal state) is in progress (step S154). That is, when the bonus combination (two types of BB) is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination operates, but the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination corresponds to the bonus combination in the game won in the internal lottery Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line, the game continues to be operated until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line in the next game and thereafter.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the internal state is the bonus, then it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S155). If it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S155), the gaming state is shifted to the bonus state (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. Ru. When a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the processing returns while the gaming state in the bonus is maintained.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S154 that the player is not in the bonus internal state, it is determined whether or not the bonus combination (here two BBs but two or more BBs may be repeated) is won in the internal lottery. A decision is made (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination is won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). When the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line in the game winning the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not performed, and the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state and the bonus game is executed. Ru. If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination is not won (NO in step S157), the gaming state controlled to the general state is returned, and the process returns.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main substrate 409 controls the gaming state to any one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has an AT function, but the execution of the AT game by the AT function is basically controlled by a separate system from the control of the game state described above. Ru. That is, the AT game can be executed in any of the general state and the bonus internal state game states. However, when it violates the restrictions such as the rules, it is not limited to that. For example, it is assumed that the AT game can not be executed in the bonus state. Below, control processing of the game state regarding AT function is explained in detail.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (refer to FIG. 49 for the lottery table), When the main processing of the indication function is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of the indication is displayed by the special display LED 612 (indication function indication), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) has the same indication function The instruction of can be effect-displayed on another display (e.g. navigation display, instruction generation effect). Although the display mode of the indication function display and the navigation display may be various, it is required that both the indications be display contents in accordance with the indication contents of the indication function determined by the main board 409.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for describing a rough process flow of the instruction function process. 57, a series of processes performed by main substrate 409 and a series of processes performed by sub substrate 510 in response to a command from main substrate 409 are described in parallel with the instruction function process performed in slot machine 1. ing. 58 and 59 are flowcharts (parts 1 and 2) showing the detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation process executed by the main substrate 409 in the instruction function process shown in FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the instruction function related process performed by the sub substrate 510. In [11-3-2], first, the outline of the instruction function process will be described with reference to FIG. 57, and in [11-3-3] and thereafter, the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. Details of each process included in the process will be described.

  Note that although various flags are used in the following description regarding instruction function processing, these flags are stored in the memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main substrate 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub substrate 510) in the board that executes the instruction function processing. It is an internal flag to be held, and rewriting and reading of values are performed by the CPU or the like of each substrate (for example, the CPU 1110 or the CPU 1118). Also, when the flag of the same name is used between the main substrate 409 and the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510), basically these internal flags have the same data format, and the main substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate side The value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to the

  In addition to the internal flags described above, variable data may be used, but these variable data may also be stored in the memory of the board to which the variable data is referred (for example, the RAM 1114 and the sub board 510 in the case of the main board 409). In this case, it is assumed that the value is held by the RAM 1122 and read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

  First, in step S61 in FIG. 57, the main substrate 409 executes processing (instruction function generation processing) regarding whether or not to generate an instruction function. More specifically, it determines the fall of the AT, determines whether to start the AT game, and determines the number of continuations of the AT game. Furthermore, it is also determined in the instruction function generation process whether or not to execute the prognostic effect of the AT game.

  Then, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process, the main substrate 409 performs a process of displaying the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game on the special display LED 612 (step S62). ). By this indication function display, it is possible to indicate the proper stopping order of the pushing order small part established during AT, or to indicate that the predetermined symbols should be aligned in the predetermined stopping order.

  In the case of a game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to perform indication function display, no specific indication function display by the special display LED 612 is performed in step S62.

  While the main board 409 displays the indication function in step S62 based on the result of the indication function generation process in step S61, the information similar to the display contents (instruction contents) in the indication function indication is displayed on the peripheral board (command etc. For example, it transmits to the sub substrate 510) (instruction information command). When the indication function display is not performed, the indication may be notified by the indication information command, or the indication information command may not be transmitted. However, when the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing this, the peripheral substrate (sub substrate 510) can not only recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also of the instruction function display. The display content (instruction content) can also be grasped.

  Then, the peripheral substrate (here, the sub-substrate 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main substrate 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 of FIG. 57 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the command function process shown in FIG. 57, the command function generation process (step S61) is initially executed by the main board 409, but the process by the main board 409 and sub board 510 thereafter (specifically, the step) The processing of S62 and the processing of steps S63 to S65) do not limit the execution timing of each other's processing.

  First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not an instruction function display is performed (or performed) in the game, and the instruction function display is performed (or performed). When it is determined (YES at step S63), an instruction generation effect process is performed as the process at step S64. When it is determined in step S63 that the indication function display is not performed (or not performed) in step S63 (NO in step S63), the instruction in step S65 is made. Perform function related processing.

  The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is for displaying an “instruction generation effect” that teaches the player the stop order and stop position (target pattern) of the reel 301 on the image display body 500 and other displays etc. This process is a process for displaying so-called AT navigation or the like. In addition, the teaching contents indicated to the player by the instruction generation effect are limited to those according to the display contents displayed on the special display LED 612 by the indication function display processing. For example, although the instruction content indicating “forward press” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, it is not permitted that the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “reverse push”. In addition, even if the instruction content indicating “forward press” is displayed by the special display LED 612 and it is indicated that “the left reel 301 a should be stopped first” as the instruction by the instruction generation effect content, the second after that It is not acceptable if the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught. In addition, it is not limited to only the above-described pressing order that the teaching contents by the instruction generation effect are limited to those according to the display contents displayed on the special display LED 612, and the indication of the pressing place in the indication function display It also applies when the is determined. That is, for example, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol even though the instruction content indicating that“ you should aim for the red 7 symbol with all reels ”is displayed by the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. It is not permitted to be "to aim at" or to "to aim at the red 7 pattern only on some reels".

  In addition, as a specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect forms such as pressing order or displaying symbols on the liquid crystal screen, lighting LEDs associated with the respective reels 301a to 301c, etc. are known. Any one or a combination of them may be used.

  The instruction function related process in step S65 relates to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed in the special display LED 612 (for example, a non-AT game or a game in which even an AT has won an unsettled winning combination). It is a process for performing display of a predetermined effect screen (for example, effect screen display corresponding to a pro-event effect) and the like, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. Among the above-mentioned "pushing order unquestioned winning combination", not only winning combinations such as pushing order unquestioned bells where payout of the maximum number of coins can be expected even if playing by any game method at the time of winning depends on the gaming method Also included are winning combinations that can not be expected or the payout can not be obtained for the maximum number of payouts. Specifically, it includes not only a winning combination (for example, a watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing a game according to a gaming method (corresponding to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency hitting method”) that can expect the maximum payout. A winning combination that can not be obtained when playing with the “maximum efficiency batting method” (for example, a symbol combination using symbols arranged on the opposite side on the symbol array of the reel 301 is prepared from the symbol combination of the above-mentioned watermelon combination, A single-piece winning combination that is determined to be a prize by stopping the symbol combination is also included.

  The instruction function process is ended by performing the processes of steps S61 to S65 described above. Below, each process (step S61-step S65) performed as an instruction | indication function process is demonstrated in detail.

[11-3-3. Instruction Function Generation Process]
[11-3-3-1. Instruction Function Generation Process of First Example]
The instruction function generation process shown in step S61 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail with reference to a specific example of the extraction table. In FIG. 58, processing in other than the special mode is mainly described, and in FIG. 59, processing in the special mode is described. The "special mode" will be described later.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 58, it is determined whether the AT flag is ON. The AT flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the AT game is in progress, and when it is ON (= 1), it means that the AT is in progress, and when it is OFF (= 0). Means not in AT, ie in non-AT. If the AT flag is ON (YES in step S601), the instruction function generation process is ended without performing the step process. If the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), it is determined in step S602 whether the AT internal flag is ON (= 1). The AT internal flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not winning of the AT game is determined (AT internal state) internally although it is not during AT, and specifically, AT After being won, the AT internal flag is turned ON when in the non-AT state until the AT game is started. Further, when the AT is not won or during the AT, the AT internal flag is turned OFF (= 0). In step S602, when the AT internal flag is ON, the process of step S603 is performed, and when the AT flag is OFF, the process of step S621 is performed.

  In step S603, an AT-added lottery is performed. In the AT addition lottery in step S603, first, it is randomly selected whether or not to add the initial game number of AT (initial game number addition winning lottery), and if it is determined to be added, how many games to be added is drawn Be played (initial game number addition game number lottery). In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after winning an AT, a predetermined game period (for example, a period of a precursor game to be described later) may be provided before the AT starts. It is assumed that the initial game number of AT may be added if the condition is satisfied. When the process of step S603 is performed, the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601) and the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S602), which means that the precursor game is in progress. Therefore, the AT addition lottery is performed. Note that, during the precursor game, a "prediction game flag" which is one of the internal flags is turned on.

  Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table used for the initial game number addition and the winning lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process (see step S3 in FIG. 54) is "Replay", "Push Order Bell", "Two Types of BB", or "Late" If it is, in most cases (65534/65535), a non-winning is selected and not added. On the other hand, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process is other than the above, namely, "pushing order unquestioned bell", "watermelon (weak / strong)", "cherry (weak / strong)", "chance eye (weak / strong) In the case of “the strongest eye”, the player wins at a certain rate (16384/65535), and the addition is selected.

  In addition, since the group of two winning combinations shown in FIG. 61 is used repeatedly for the sake of simplicity in the following description, “Replay”, “Push Order Bell”, “Two Types BB”, and “Hot” are won. The role will be called "the winning combination of group A", and the winning combinations other than group A, ie, "push order unquestionable bell", "watermelon (weak / strong)", "cherry (weak / strong)", "chance The winning combination of the eyes (low / strong) and the "strongest eyes" will be called "the winning combination of group B". Needless to say, the division of the winning combinations by the group A and the group B is merely an example for explanation to the last, and may actually be a division of different winning combinations, or three or more. It may be a category of winning combinations different for each lottery table.

  Further, FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the initial game number addition game number lottery. The initial game number addition game number lottery is performed when the initial game number addition is won by a winning lottery. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the distribution pattern of the number of added games is set to be different depending on whether the winning combination is the winning combination of the A group or the B combination. As a rule of thumb, in the case of the winning combination of the A group, a relatively small number of games are often selected, and only up to 200 games can be selected. On the other hand, in the case of the winning combination of the B group, although it is the same that a small number of games is easy to be selected, a higher number of games is easier to be selected than in the case of the A group. There is also the possibility of

  After the AT addition lottery is performed in step S603, it is determined whether or not the initial game number addition winning lottery is won (step S604), and if it is determined that it is won, the current "AT A process of adding the number of added games selected in the initial game number addition game number lottery to the initial number of games is performed (initial game number addition). The “AT initial game number” is variable data for indicating the number of AT games to be set at the start of AT. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of step S606. Also in the case where it is determined in step S604 that the initial number-of-games addition winning lottery has not won, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the "number of prognostic games" is decremented by one. The "precursor game number" is variable data for indicating the number of "precursor game" games in which the AT's precursor effect (details will be described later) can occur.

  Next, in step S607, it is determined whether the number of precursor games has become 0 or not. If the number of precursor games is other than 0, that is, if the period of the precursor games remains (NO in step S 607), the instruction function generation processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the precursor game number is 0 in step S607 (YES in step S607), this means that the precursor game has ended, and since the AT internal flag is ON at this time, the AT game is started. To turn on the "AT flag" (step S608). Thereafter, the AT internal flag and the precursor game flag are turned OFF (steps S609 and S610), the "special status flag" and the "each status flag" are also turned OFF (steps S611 and S612), and the instruction function generation process is ended. .

  Here, the “special state flag” is an internal flag that is turned on when the game is advanced in the “special mode”. In the first embodiment, the “special mode” is not a mere effect mode, but a special mode in which the winning probability and the like related to the AT lottery is preferential. The conditions and the like at the time of transition to the “special mode” will be described each time in the processing of each step shown later. In addition, with regard to the AT lottery game state controlled in the case of being in the "special mode", in the following description, when the dedicated "special state" AT lottery game state is controlled, the game is performed in the "special mode". It will be done. The derivation example will be described later. When there are a plurality of “special states” (special state 1, special state 2, special state 3) (for example, see FIG. 63), one special state flag manages a plurality of states (for example, special) If the status flag is 0, it is OFF, and if it is 1, the special status 1 or 2 is special status 2 or 3 special status 3), or the special status according to each special status A flag may be provided (for example, a special state 1 flag, a special state 2 flag, and a special state 3 flag may be prepared). In any case, in the following determination that the special state is ON or OFF, it is determined to be ON when controlled to any special state, and determined to be OFF when not controlled to any special state.

  In addition, “each status flag” is a plurality of “AT lottery game states” (for example, a low probability state, a high probability state, a super high probability state, etc.) prepared so that the winning expectation regarding the first hit lottery etc. It is an internal flag for showing the control state about "each state" of special states 1-3, a hell state, etc.). Therefore, each status flag can be understood as including a special status flag or a hell status flag. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the case of "turning off each state flag", the state flags related to all AT lottery game states are returned to the initial setting (in this example, the low probability state is turned on) If you say "turn each state flag ON", the state flag corresponding to the AT lottery game state selected by the last state transition lottery is turned ON (other state flags are OFF) Means that). Also, in the case of "turn off each state flag", each state flag when not in AT (for example, low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state, etc. that can be controlled even if not in AT) All state flags related to each state may be set to OFF, or a predetermined state may be set to ON. The details of “special state”, “each state”, “state transition lottery (state transition lottery A, B, C, special state transition lottery)” and the like will be described later.

  If the AT flag is OFF in step S602, that is, if the AT is not won internally during non-AT, whether or not the special status flag is OFF (= 0) in step S621. It is judged. The process when the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the special state flag is OFF in step S621 (YES in step S621), a first AT hit lottery is performed (step S622). The AT first hit lottery is a lottery for determining the win for the AT game in a state where the AT game is not won. The condition in which the process of step S 622 is performed is that the AT is not in progress (AT flag OFF in step S 601), the AT internally is not elected (AT internal flag OFF), and is not the special mode (special flag OFF). Therefore, it is considered that the player is in a normal state in which neither the AT nor the precursor game is won, or in the precursor game in which the AT is not won (in front of the case).

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for AT first hit lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 63, the winning probability of the first AT hit is set based on the gaming state controlled when the first AT winning lottery is performed and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. There is.

  Here, the gaming state described in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is “the gaming state regarding the winning combination lottery” in which different numbers are set in the internal lottery of the winning combination as described in FIG. 49 (specifically, , Not a general state, a bonus internal state, a bonus state), but different numbers are set in a lottery relating to an AT first hit or a prognostic game of AT, etc. “AT related gaming state”, and thereafter “AT lottery game state” Call it

  According to FIG. 63, as a specific example of the AT lottery game state, the hell state, the low probability state, the high probability state, the super high probability state, the special state 1, the special state 2 in the descending order of the winning probability of the first AT hit. , And special state 3 are prepared.

  To briefly explain each AT lottery game state, first, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning at the first AT hit regardless of which winning combination is selected. Next, the low certainty state is an initial state of the AT lottery game state, and a low winning combination which is relatively difficult to be won by internal lottery (also referred to as "ra combination", specifically, watermelon combination, cherry combination, chance) In addition, it is possible to expect an AT first hit to a certain degree when a bell in an order of inquisitives other than a bonus state may be included in the role of rare. In particular, when the winning probability in the same kind of rare role (for example, weak watermelon and strong watermelon, etc.) is compared, it is set to be easy to win when "strong" type is more than "weak" type. These tendencies are the same in other AT lottery game states. In addition, if a winning combination other than the rare combination (non-rare combination), that is, a high winning combination that is relatively easy to win by internal lottery (specifically, replay and push bell) is selected, any AT Even in the lottery game state, it is almost impossible to expect an AT first win.

  In this example, the “low winning combination (rare combination)”, which is relatively difficult to win by internal lottery, is a winning combination because the degree of expectation regarding advantageous games (for example, winning at AT first hit) is relatively high. It is an expectation role. On the other hand, the "high winning combination (non-rare combination)" other than the rare combination is a "low expectation combination" because it is a winning combination having a lower degree of expectation regarding advantageous games than the "high winning combination".

  The high certainty state is a gaming state where the expectation of winning the first hit of AT based on each winning combination is generally higher than the low certainty state, and the super high certainty state is the winning expectation more than the high certainty state. It is a high gaming state.

  The special states 1 to 3 are dedicated gaming states controlled in the “special mode” in this example. The special states 1 to 3 have a higher expectation of winning to the first AT per win than the above-mentioned AT lottery game states (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state), and the winning combination is a rare role. If so, the AT first win is won with a probability of at least 55000/65535 or more. Further, according to FIG. 63, the special state 2 is more than the special state 1 and the special state 3 is more than the special state 2 and the probability of winning to the first AT hit is higher and the gaming state is high.

  Note that the distribution in the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is an example, and for example, even if a distribution such as being elected to the first AT hit is always performed when the winning combination is a rare combination in a special state. Good. Also, each of these states may shift to another state based on the winning combination, but such a transition lottery of the AT lottery gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, FIG. 74 and the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the "playing state related to the winning combination lottery" is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, the "playing state related to AT" is set to any of the above AT drawing gaming states. It is controlled. It is managed by ON / OFF of "each state flag" whether it is controlled by which of such AT lottery game states. "Each state flag" is an internal flag provided corresponding to each of the AT lottery game states, and is a low probability state flag, a high probability state flag, a super high probability state flag, a special state flag (special state 1 flag ... Special state 3 flag) corresponds to the hell state flag. A plurality of these status flags are not simultaneously turned ON, and when only one status flag is turned ON, the other status flags are turned OFF. For example, in the case of being controlled to the super high certainty state, among the state flags, the super high certainty state flag is turned on, and the other respective state flags are turned off. It should be noted that "each state flag" does not have to be an individual flag corresponding to the type of AT lottery game state, but an internal flag (for example, a flag value is 1) that manages all AT lottery game states collectively. It may be an internal flag that can be managed as in the low certainty state, 2 in the high certainty state, and the like.

  In step S623, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit is won by the AT first hit lottery in step S622. If the AT first hit is won (YES in step S623), the process of step S624 is performed. If the AT first hit is not won (NO in step S623), the process of step S632 is performed.

  In step S 624, a precursor lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute (migrate or not) the “precursor game”.

  Here, the "precursor game" and the "precursor effect" in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the "precursor game" is a special game in which "precursor effects" can occur, and the precursor game is played over the predetermined number of games (the number of multiple games) selected by the lottery. The "prediction effect" is an effect that indicates or indicates whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state (in this case, the transition to the AT) is based on the result. The "prediction effect" is an effect which is continuously performed over a plurality of games, and as a specific example of an effect, for example, a "continuous effect" which is performed over a plurality of games and a suggestion effect which is completed in one game (For example, it is formed by intermingling with a small part navigation instruction, a title display, etc.). The details of the "continuous effect" will be described later in the description of the instruction function related process by the peripheral substrate (see FIG. 60).

  In the present example described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59, etc., a prodatorial effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the prognostic game, and the final game of the prognostic effect is the final game of the prognostic game. Therefore, the success or failure result of the AT transition indicated by the precursor effect can be understood as the result of the precursor game. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the prognostic game is made in either of the case of winning the AT first hit (at the time of AT winning) and the case of not having won the AT first hitting (at the time of AT non-winning). It may be started. The precursor game (or precursor effect) played at the time of AT winning is called "precursor", and the precursor game (or precursor effect) played at the time when AT is not won is called "Gasse prophet". In the case of this aura, it is shown that AT transition is made at the end, and in the case of Gasse aura, it is shown that AT does not transition at the end.

  In addition, the precursor game for which execution is determined in the indication function generation processing according to the present invention not only includes the "prediction effect" in which the "continuous effect" is performed as described above, but also includes various other effects. It is feasible. For example, "Scramble effect" (for example, characteristic background effects frequently occur, colors of characters such as character serifs, etc.) that are not continuous effects with continuity, but some predetermined effects occur more frequently than usual It is conceivable to perform changing presentation etc. frequently).

  And when using such a "scramble effect", as a pattern example of a precursor game (presence game), a pattern of "scramble effect A" + "continuous effect A (precursor effect)", "continuous effect A" + " Patterns such as "Sawatsuki production A" + "Continuous production B (precursor production)", "Continuous production A" + "Sawatsuki production A" + "Sawatsuki production B" + "Continuous production B (Proactive production)", etc. can be executed It is. In the case of the aura, it is preferable to finally announce a win for AT transition, so it is preferable that the admonition effect is finally performed.

  On the other hand, as a pattern example of the prognostic game (Gasse apocalypse), since it is not necessary to finally win AT transition, there is no need to perform a prognostic effect at the end of the Gasse apocalypse. It is also possible to execute a pattern in which only "scratch effect" is performed, or a pattern in which the "end in the" scratch effect "is finished while combining the" continuous effect "and the" scratch effect ". In addition, in the case of the pattern that ends with "scramble effect" at the time of the pretense, the end of the "continuous effect (prediction effect)" performed before that appears to be the end of the precursor game, and the "scramble effect" is a game after the precursor game You may look as if it is displayed. Further, in any prognostic game (presence game, pre-cased game), in addition to the “continuous effect” and the “scramble effect”, “normal effect” may be mixed with that in the normal time.

  As described above, although the precursor game determined by the indication function generation processing according to the present invention can be executed in various patterns, in the present example, any precursor game (this precursor, Gasse aura, Also in the case of), the game proceeds in a pattern of “normal effect” + “continuous effect (precursor effect)”. At this time, as described above, in the precursor game, the precursor effect is always performed over a plurality of games, and the final game of the precursor effect can be made the final game of the precursor game.

  In the precursor lottery in step S 624, since the AT first win is won in step S 622 in advance, it is determined whether or not the precursor game (principal) is to be performed before starting the AT. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the prognostic lottery is performed even when the player does not win by AT first winning lottery (for example, step S633 described later). It is determined whether or not the game (presence of a game) is to be played, but in the case of a presage of a case, although a prophetic effect is executed which can cause the player to expect to shift to the AT, it is actually performed The transition to AT is not shown.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 409 determines the propriety of the prognostic game (for example, the prognostic lottery in step S624) and determines the prognostic game number which is the number of the executed games (for example, step S626). Process up to the lottery of the number of the aura games, and then execute a process related to the presentation of the subsequent aces game (for example, display a message suggesting during the aura game) or determine the presentation contents and the execution opportunity of the aura It is preferable that the processing of causing the effect to be executed according to the determination result is performed by the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510) that receives the precursor game number command from the main substrate 409. This is because when the main substrate 409 performs all or most of the above processes, the processing amount by the main substrate 409 becomes excessive, and the processing capacity of the main substrate 409 (the upper limit of the capacity is defined) overflows In order to prevent the In recent gaming machines, as a result of progress in enhancement of the type and content of effects, the amount of data necessary for processing concerning effects has increased. Considering such a background, there is a limit to performing processing related to presentation on the main substrate 409 as well, and the processing load is dispersed between the main substrate 409 and the peripheral substrate as described above. It is possible not only to suppress the processing capacity but also to enhance the effect contents (rendering pattern) by the peripheral substrate that is not restricted by the capacity restriction. Details of the processing relating to the effect of the precursor game will be described later in the instruction function related processing (FIG. 60 and the like) by the sub-substrate 510.

  FIGS. 64 to 66 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) for describing a lottery table used for the prognostic lottery. According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the precursor lottery, it is lottery whether or not to execute the precursor game (present / not present) based on the winning combination and the AT lottery gaming state. FIG. 64 is an example of a lottery table used in the precursor lottery performed at the time of winning the AT, in other words, a lottery table used in the precursor lottery of the precursor. Further, FIG. 65 shows a precursor lottery performed when the player does not win at the first AT hit (non-winning AT) in the non-special mode (for example, the state where the AT lottery gaming state is controlled other than the special state and the game is performed). 66 shows an example of the lottery table used when the AT is not won in the special mode (for example, the state where the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state and the game is performed). An example of a lottery table used in FIG. In other words, FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are lottery tables used for a precursor lottery of Gasse aura.

  In the precursor lottery in step S624, the lottery table of FIG. 64 is used. In the case where the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 64 is used, the execution of the precursor game is determined in any AT lottery game state, but the presence / absence distribution is changed and the precursor game is not executed. May be prepared.

  Next, in step S625, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery in step S624 has been won, that is, whether or not execution of the precursor game has been determined, and if it has been won (YES), the process of step S626 is performed. If it has not been won (NO), the process of step S631 is performed.

  In step S626, a precursor game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games in which the precursor game is to be performed (the number of precursor games). FIGS. 67 to 70 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 4) for explaining a lottery table used for the prog- ress game number lottery. Similar to the lottery table (FIGS. 64 to 66) used for the precursor lottery, the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery is based on the presence or absence of the special mode when the lottery is performed, and the presence or absence of the AT winning. Different lottery tables are prepared. FIG. 67 shows an example of a lottery table to be selected at AT winning in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table to be selected at AT not winning in a mode other than the special mode. FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected at AT winning in the mode, and FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected at AT non-winning in the special mode. In step S626, the lottery table of FIG. 67 is used.

  According to the lottery table shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, in the precursor game number lottery, the precursor game number is lottery based on the winning combination and the AT lottery gaming state. Then, during the precursor game number selected by the lottery, a precursor game is played, a precursor effect is produced on the way, and it is notified at the end whether or not to shift to the AT. In addition, about the distribution by the winning combination in each lottery table, in FIG. 67 to FIG. These lottery tables may be separately mounted on different lottery tables for each winning combination, but as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. It has the effect of reducing the capacity.

  Comparing FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, while a relatively small number of precursor games (specifically, four games) are selected in the special mode, a relatively long number of precursor games (in the non-special mode) Specifically, eight or more games are selected.

  Further, comparing FIG. 67 with FIG. 68, the number of precursor games when AT is not elected (ie, the precursor of the Gasse precursor) in AT winning (in FIG. 67) and AT non-winning in other than the special mode (FIG. 68). In the case of the number of games), the number of games slightly smaller than the number of prognostic games at the time of winning the AT (that is, the number of prognostic games of the precends) is more likely to be selected. In addition, while the maximum number of precursor games at AT non-winning time is 32 games, the maximum number of precursor games at AT winning time is 36 games, so the number of specific warning games is 32 (32 In the case of exceeding the above, at that time, it is possible to achieve a special effect that it is determined that the true sign indicating AT winning will be made.

  After the precursor game number lottery is performed in step S626, the precursor game number selected in the lottery is set as variable data for the "number of precursor games" (step S627). Then, the "precursor game flag" which is one of the internal flags is turned ON (= 1) (step S628), and the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S629), whereby the precursor game is started in the subsequent games. The flag to be set is set. Then, the start of the precursor game means that it is not in the special mode (special state), so the special state flag is turned off (step S630), and the instruction function generation processing is ended.

  In step S 631, the AT flag is turned ON to shift to AT without performing a lottery for the number of prognostic games because the player did not win the prognostic lottery although the AT first winning lottery was won, and then the instruction function generation processing is performed. Finish.

  In step S632, processing is performed when it is determined in step S623 that the first AT winning lottery has not been won, but specifically, it is determined whether or not the precursor game flag is OFF (= 0). . If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is OFF (YES in step S632), the process of step S633 is performed, and if it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (step S632) NO), the process of step S641 is performed.

  In step S633, a precursor lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the precursor game. The precursor lottery in step S633 is the same lottery process as step S624 described above, but since it has not been won in the first AT per step in step S623, it is determined whether or not to carry out the gasse aura using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. A lottery is drawn. According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, when the winning combination other than the rare combination (non-rare combination) is selected, the execution of the precursor game is almost not selected, but the weak rare combination (weak watermelon, weak cherry, When the weak chance game is selected as the winning combination, there is a high possibility that the execution of the precursor game will be selected. If the winning combination is a strong rare, the possibility of the precursor game being executed becomes even higher, and in the case of the strongest eye, the execution of the precursor game is always selected.

  Next, in step S634, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery in step S633 has been won, that is, whether or not execution of the precursor game has been determined, and if it has been won (YES), the process of step S635 is performed If the player has not won (NO), the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S635, a prognostic game number lottery is performed to determine the prognostic game number to be played in the prognostic game, and in step S636, the prognostic game number determined by the drawing is set as variable data for the "precursor game number". In step S637, the "prediction game flag" is turned ON (= 1). The processes of steps S635 to S637 are the same as the processes of steps S626 to S628 described above, and thus detailed description will be omitted. After step S637, the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S 638, a lottery (state transition lottery A) regarding the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. When the current AT lottery game state is the low probability state, the high probability state, or the ultra high probability state, the state transition lottery A is any AT lottery among the low probability state, the high probability state, or the ultra high probability state Whether to shift to the game state (including the continuation of the current state) is a lottery. In step S 678 of FIG. 59 described later, when the current AT lottery game state is a special state (special states 1 to 3), which of the low probability state, high probability state, or super high probability state A state transition lottery B is shown for lottery whether to shift to the AT lottery gaming state.

  Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. FIGS. FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 show the lottery tables for state transition lottery A used when the currently controlled AT lottery game states are controlled to the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state, respectively. An example of When performing a state transition lottery, it is possible to recognize which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled by referring to the value of each state flag.

  The features of the lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 will be briefly described. Referring to FIG. 71 used in the low confidence state, when in the low confidence state, it is hardly possible to shift (promotion) to the super high confidence state except when the winning combination is the strongest eye, and it is practically possible. As sex, it is understood that when the winning combination is a rare combination, transition to a high certainty state (promotion) can be selected. In particular, it is easy to promote to the high certainty state when the role of weak rare, specifically, the promotion to the high certainty state is selected at 16384/65535.

  Referring to FIG. 72 used in the high confidence state, when the winning combination is the rare combination, when the winning combination is the rare combination, it does not shift to the low confidence state (demotion), and the winning combination is replay, push order bell, 2 types. It can be seen that there is a possibility of demotion only with a very low probability (1310/65535) if it was BB, which was a loss. It is understood that there is a possibility of transition (promotion) in the super high certainty state, which is the high-order state, when the winning combination is the rare combination (in particular, the pushing order unquestioned bell or the weak rare combination). In the overall high certainty state, the state is mostly maintained or promoted, and hardly demoted to the low certainty state.

  Referring to FIG. 73 which is used in the super high confidence state, when the winning combination is the rare role, it does not shift to the low status (demotion) when in the super high confidence state, and the winning combination is replayed, push bell It can be understood that there is a possibility of demoting to the low certainty state or the high certainty state only with a very low probability in the case of two types of BB, if they are lost. That is, in many cases, even when the state transition lottery A is performed in the ultra-high certainty state, the ultra-high certainty state is maintained, so that the state of high benefit for the AT is maintained.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition lottery A regarding the state transition of the AT lottery gaming state is not limited to being performed during the AT game, and any gaming state in the non-AT game (for example, general The same may be applied to states and bonus internal states). And in the state transition lottery A during such a non-AT game, the same lottery table as exemplified in FIGS. 71 to 73 may be used, or another distribution in which different distribution is set according to the gaming state A lottery table may be used.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition of the AT lottery game state is lottery using the lottery table in which different transition probabilities are set based on the winning combinations. And, based on the selection ratio of the transition destination state, it is possible to calculate the number of games in which each AT lottery game state is continuously controlled (so-called average number of stay games). Specifically, for example, using FIG. 49 (lottery table for winning combination lottery) and FIGS. 71 to 73 (lottery table for state transition lottery A), the average number of stay games of each AT lottery game state in the bonus internal state is When calculated, the average number of stay games in the low probability state is about 120 games, the average number of stay games in the high probability state is about 25 games, and the average number of stay games in the super high probability state is about 36 games. And, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the average stay game number of each AT lottery game state is not limited to the above calculation example, for example, the average stay game number of each is preset and corresponds to the setting As described above, the selection probability of each winning combination and the selection ratio of the transition destination state may be adjusted.

  Further, in the case of the above calculation example, the longest average stay game number is about 120 games in the low probability state, and the shortest average stay game number is about 25 games in the high probability state. On the other hand, since the number of stay games in the “special state”, which is another AT lottery game state, is selected from among 2 games to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), the average number of stay games in the special state is The number of games is shorter than the average number of stay games in any of the low certainty state, the high certainty state, and the super high certainty state. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the previous stage, the average stay game number of each AT lottery game state can be arbitrarily set, but the average stay game number of the special state is the other AT lottery game It is preferable that the number of games is relatively shorter than the average number of stay games in the state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra high probability state).

  After the state transition lottery A in step S638 is performed, each state flag is set to ON to correspond to the state of the transition destination determined in the lottery (step S639), and the instruction function generation processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (NO in step S632), processing of subtracting the value of the variable data of “number of precursor games” is performed as the processing of step S641. Then, in step S642, it is determined whether or not the precursor game number is zero. If it is determined that the precursor game number is 0 (YES in step S642), it means that the precursor game has ended, so the precursor game flag is turned OFF (step S643). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S642), this means that the precursor game continues, and the process of step S649 described later is performed.

  After the process of step S643 is performed, a special state transition lottery is performed to lottery whether or not to shift to the "special mode (special state)" (step S644).

  Here, transition conditions to the special mode (special state) in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the prognostic effect of displaying (suggesting, teaching) as a result whether or not to shift to AT can be performed, but the prognostic effect ends in the prognostic game Not only the pattern to return to the gaming state (the gaming state here means the AT lottery gaming state) before the start of the precursor game (or precursor effect), but also another special gaming state (special state) May be controlled (transition to special mode). If the transition to the AT is determined by the omen effect, the AT game is started as it is, so there is no transition to the special mode. Therefore, such a special state is a special AT lottery game state that can be controlled only after transition to AT is not indicated in the precursor game (that is, in the present case, it is controlled to the special state). The game situation to be advanced is called "special mode".

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the end of the gasse, it is lottery whether or not to shift to the special mode (control to the special state), and when the lottery is won, control to the special state is performed. Period (number of special state games) is determined by lottery. Then, the game proceeds in the special mode until the special state game number is consumed, and the AT lottery, the precursor lottery, etc. are performed again based on the winning combination selected during that time. Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, one of the features is that the drawing for the AT in the special mode is performed in a more preferential situation than before the execution of the gasse aura, such a special mode Even if the transition to AT is denied by the Gase apocalypse by preparing the A, the transition to the special mode with high expectation to the AT can be made, thereby lowering the player's sense of expectation by the Gasse apologetic Can be suppressed to maintain a sense of expectation for the special game (AT game). It should be noted that that the lottery relating to the AT in the special mode is favored, for example, in the lottery table of the AT first hitting lottery shown in FIG. 63, the AT first hitting winning probability in the special state 1 to the special state 3 is favored. It is shown in the The special state 1 to the special state 3 are gaming states which are separately set so that the degree of such preferential treatment is different, and the preferential degree is high in the order of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3.

  In this example, it is assumed that which one of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is to be controlled is determined based on the gaming state when the transition to the special state is determined. Specifically, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low probability state, the special state 1 is selected as the transition destination special state, and similarly, the special state 2 is selected in the high probability state. , Special state 3 is selected in the case of the super high certainty state. In this way, the special state of the transition destination is favored (special state according to the degree of advantage of the gaming state before the transition to the special state (low probability state <high probability state <ultra high probability state) 1 <special state 2 <special state 3). Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to one-to-one correspondence between the gaming state before transition and the transition-destination special state as described above. As another example, for example, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low certainty state, either the special state 1 or the special state 2 is drawn as the state of the transition destination, and similarly, the high certainty state In this case, either the special state 2 or the special state 3 may be drawn, and in the case of the super high certainty state, the special state 3 may be transferred.

  Further, in the processing shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a special state transition lottery is performed in the final game of the Gasse, and when the lottery is won, the mode is shifted to the special mode immediately after the Gasse has ended. By performing such processing, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the transition to the special mode is not made until the gasse precursor reaches the final game, and therefore the AT transition is not denied. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not to win the AT transition until the final game, even if it is a false sign.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the timing for transitioning to the special mode after the end of the gassing precursor is not limited to the immediate transition after the end of the gassing precursor described above. For example, a relatively short waiting period (waiting game) may be provided before transition to the special mode after the end of the false alarm (however, the standby game period may be shorter than the number of false alarm games). preferable). And when providing such a standby game, it is preferable to control to a specific presentation state during a standby game. Specifically, the specific effect state may be, for example, a high-frequency effect mode in which a predetermined effect occurs with high frequency. If it is controlled in the high frequency rendering mode during the standby game, the rendering can be generated over a plurality of games of the standby game, so a rendering (short precursor) similar to a prognostic rendering over a plurality of games can be generated. This can be realized and can be expected to improve the gameplay. Also, in the case of providing a standby game, even if the precursor game is a garbled affair, it will be possible to expect to shift to the special mode if an effect that can be inferred to be a standby game occurs after the game ends. Can be expected to maintain the interest of people

  In step S644, a special state transition lottery is performed using a predetermined lottery table for lottery whether to shift to the special mode as described above. FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing a lottery table used for the special state transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table for the special state transition lottery is in the special state based on the winning combination of the current game and the current AT lottery game state (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state). A winning ratio to be controlled (transition to a special state) is set. Specifically, when the winning combination is a rare combination, regardless of the AT lottery gaming state, the transition to the special mode is always won. If the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the higher the AT lottery game state is, the easier it is to win the transition to the special mode, and if it is a super high probability state, the winning combination is Even in the non-rare role, winning a transition to the special mode at a rate of more than half (32768/65535). In addition, as described above, when the transition to the special state is determined, the special state 1 to the special based on the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state) at the time of the determination. It is assumed that it is determined which of state 3 is controlled.

  Then, in step S645, it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode is won in the special state transition lottery in step S644, and if the transition to the special mode is won (YES in step S645), step S646 and subsequent The process is performed, and when the transition to the special mode is not won (NO in step S645), the process of step S649 described later is performed.

  In step S646, in response to the winning in the special state transition lottery in step S644, a period (the number of special state games) to be controlled to the special mode is determined by the lottery (special state game number lottery). FIG. 75 is a view for explaining the lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. According to FIG. 75, the number of special state games is randomly selected from among different distributions depending on whether the winning combination is a rare combination or a non-rare combination (non-rare combination), and the winning combination is a non rare combination. In some cases, the game is selected from 2 games to 9 games, and when the winning combination is a rare game, it is selected from 2 games to 20 games. In the case of the lottery table of FIG. 75, when the winning combination is the rare combination, not only the expectation of the maximum game number is high but also the average number of games is large, so it can be expected that the special mode continues for a long time. Since the special mode is favored with respect to the AT before the execution of the precursor game (or precursor effect), the fact that the special mode lasts means that the expectation to the AT is higher. .

  Next, in step S647, the number of special state games selected in the special state game number lottery in step S646 is set in variable data "number of special state games" for indicating the number of special state games, and then the special state flag is set. The processing is turned on (step S648), and the instruction function generation processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S642 that the precursor game number is not 0, or if it is determined in step S645 that the transition to the special mode has not been won, state transition lottery A is performed as the processing in step S649. Is done. The state transition lottery A in step S649 is the same as the state transition lottery A described in step S638, and the state of the transition destination is the lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) corresponding to the current AT lottery state. It is determined.

  Then, in step S650, each state flag corresponding to the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery A in step S649 is turned ON, and the instruction function generation process is ended.

  The above is the description of each process shown in FIG. In the following, each process shown in FIG. 59 will be described. The process shown in FIG. 59 is a process to be subsequently performed when it is determined that the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) in step S621 in FIG. In FIG. 59, when the same processing as that described in FIG. 58 is performed, the detailed description may be omitted.

  First, in FIG. 59, an AT first hit lottery is performed in step S661. The first AT winning lottery in step S 661 is the same as the process described in step S 622, and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in step S662, it is determined whether the hell state flag is OFF (= 0). As described above, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning at the first AT, regardless of which winning combination is selected. The slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is controlled to the special state after the end of the precursor game (Gasse precursor) in which the winning result for the transition to the AT is not indicated by the precursor effect. Then, if the player is elected as the winning combination in the special period with a game period controlled (special mode), and a win is made in the first AT, a precursor effect indicating the win result for the transition to the AT is selected. The generated precursor game (present precursor) is executed. Since the transition winning to the AT is determined during the period when the true precursor is executed, even if the further AT winning is performed, it becomes a useless game. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the first sign is won in the special mode and the present sign is executed, the unnecessary sign is won by controlling the present sign period to the “hell state”. To make it happen. In addition, when transitioning from the special mode to the agile precursor, it can be controlled to the hell state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when being controlled to the “hell state” as described above, not only the AT winning may be suppressed, but a benefit advantageous to the player may be provided. Specifically, for example, an AT addition lottery may be performed in which the number of AT games is added (the AT addition lottery may be more easily performed than in a normal AT game). The processing relating to this AT addition lottery may be performed in the same manner as the AT addition lottery performed in the internal state of AT described in step S603.

  If it is determined in step S662 that the hell status flag is OFF (YES in step S662), the processing in step S663 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell status flag is not OFF (is ON) ( The process of step S681 described later is performed.

  In step S663, it is determined whether or not the winning combination of the game is other than replay, pushing order bell, two types of BB, or "disappearing" (ie, whether the winning combination is the "rare combination"), It is determined by referring to the operating condition device. In addition, about the winning combination used as the reference | standard of this judgment, in this example, it is considered as a "ra role" for the simplification of description, Comprising: It is not necessary to necessarily limit only to a "ra role", Moreover, specific " It may be limited to the role of rare. If it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is "the rare combination" (YES in step S663), the process of step S664 is performed, and if it is determined that the winning combination is other than the "small combination" ( The process of step S671 is performed.

  The process of step S664 is a process performed when the player is elected in the special mode. Referring to FIG. 64 (lottery table used in the AT lottery to be played at the time of AT winning), it can be seen that the AT game is generated when the AT is won when the winning combination is the rare combination. Also, referring to FIG. 66 (lottery table used in the precursor lottery performed when AT is not won in the state controlled to the special mode), when the winning combination is a rare combination, the first AT winning lottery is made. Even if the player does not win (AT not won), it can be seen that the precursor game always occurs (corresponding to the situation when the process of step S672 described below is performed). Therefore, by performing a precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 before the process of step S664 is performed (not shown), it is possible to determine the transition to the precursor game.

  In addition, as described above, when the special mode is controlled, if the rare combination is selected as a winning combination, a prediction game always occurs even if the AT first winning lottery is not won (AT non-winning) Therefore, it is a game state in which it is easy to be connected to the continuous effect (the omen effect in the omen game). Therefore, a screen display such as "during continuous effect preparation" may be performed as the display in the special mode to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to generate the continuous effect. In addition, focusing on the occurrence of a precursor game (and continuous effects) when the player wins the role of rare during the special mode, a screen display such as "If you draw the role of rare now?" Is displayed as a display during the special mode. Alternatively, the player may be made to expect the player to win the rare role. In any case, the special mode can be regarded as a mode that leads to a subsequent precursor game (or a precursor effect or a continuous effect). Can also include special modes.

  Then, in step S664, since the execution of the prognostic game is decided, a prognostic game number lottery is performed, and as a process following the lottery, the set of the prognostic game number drawn (step S665) and the prognostic game flag ON (step S666) is performed. Note that the process of steps S664 to S666 is the same as the process described in steps 626 to S628 of FIG. 58, and thus details thereof will be omitted, but in the precursor game number lottery of step S664, it is shown in FIG. A lottery table (a lottery table selected at AT winning time / AT non-winning time in the special mode) is used.

  Thereafter, in step S667, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit is won by the AT first hit lottery in step S661. If it is determined that the AT first hit is won (YES in step S667), the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S668), and then the process of step S669 is performed. If it is not determined that the first AT hit has been won (NO in step S667), the process of step S669 is performed.

  In step S669, since it is determined that the precursor game is started (prediction game flag ON) from the progress so far, the special state flag is turned OFF. Furthermore, since the state to be controlled to the hell state is in progress during the precursor game (in the precursor game), the hell state flag is turned on in step S670, and the instruction function generation processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is other than the “lea role” (NO in step S663), as the process in step S671, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit was won by the AT first hit lottery in step S661. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S671 that the first AT is won (YES of step S671), the process of step S672 is performed. When the process of step S 672 is performed, as described above in step S 664, the precursor game is always generated. Therefore, by performing a precursor lottery as shown in step S 624 of FIG. 58 before the processing of step S 672 is performed (not shown), it is possible to determine the transition to the precursor game.

  Then, in step S672, a precursor game number lottery is performed, and thereafter, the precursor game number selected in the lottery is set to the variable data "number of precursor games" (step S673), and the precursor game flag is turned ON (step S673). Step S674). The processes of steps S672 to S674 are the same as the processes described in steps S664 to S666 and steps 626 to S628 in FIG. Thereafter, the AT internal flag is set to ON (step S 675), and the processes after step S 669 described above are performed.

  If it is not determined in the determination process of step S671 that the first AT is won (NO in step S671), the process of step S676 is performed.

  The process of step S 676 is performed in a situation where the player has not won the special role in the special mode and has not won the first AT. Referring to FIG. 66, the precursor game is not executed in such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to determine not to shift to the precursor game by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown) before the processing of step S676 is performed.

  Then, in step S 676, the value of “number of special state games”, which is variable data for indicating the number of games in the special mode, is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S677, it is determined whether or not the value of the special state game number is 0, and if it is determined that it is 0, this means the end of the special mode, so steps S678 to S680 related to state transition are performed. After the process is performed, the instruction function generation process is ended. If it is determined in step S677 that the value of the special state game number is not 0, this means that the special mode will continue, so the instruction function generation processing is ended without performing the processing of steps S678 to S680. Do.

  In step S 678, a lottery relating to the state transition of the AT lottery game state (state transition lottery B) is performed. When the current AT lottery game state is any of the special states 1 to 3, the state transition lottery B shifts to which AT lottery game state among the low probability state, the high probability state, or the super high probability state. (Including the continuation of the current state).

  Here, FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. FIGS. 76, 77 and 78 show the lottery table for the state transition lottery B used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state 1, the special state 2 or the special state 3, respectively. It is an example. When performing a state transition lottery, it is possible to recognize which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled by referring to the value of each state flag (in particular, the special state flag).

  In any of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the state of the transfer destination is lottery based on the winning combination. Referring to FIG. 76, when being controlled to the special state 1, there is no transition to the super high probability state, and when the winning combination is the rare role, the transition to the high probability state is always selected, If the winning combination is the non-rare combination, the transition to the low confidence state or the high confidence state is selected at almost the same level. Referring to FIG. 77, when controlled to the special state 2, there is no transition to the low confidence state, and the transition to the high confidence state or the ultra high probability state is selected although there is a difference depending on the winning combination. Be done. In addition, when the winning combination is the rare combination, the transition to the super high probability state is more likely to be selected than in the non-rare combination. Referring to FIG. 78, when controlled to the special state 3, there is no transition to the low probability state or the high probability state, and the transition to the ultra high probability state is always selected. Thus, comparing FIG. 76 to FIG. 78, the AT lottery game state (low probability state <high probability state <high state) with a high degree of advantage in the relationship of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 It can be seen that the transition of is easily selected, and from this point as well, it can be seen that the special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 has a high degree of advantage.

  After the state transition lottery B in step S678 is performed, the special mode flag is turned OFF since the special mode ends (step S679), and the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery B in step S678 is obtained. Each state flag is set to ON so as to correspond (step S680), and the instruction function generation process is ended.

  Next, processing in step S681 and subsequent steps performed when it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is not OFF (is ON) will be described. The situation in which the process of step S681 is performed is that the AT internal flag is not ON (step S602), the special state flag is not OFF (step S621), and the hell state flag is not OFF (step S662). For example, this corresponds to a state where execution of a precursor game (Gasse precursor) is performed with no AT winning after the special mode is entered.

  The processing performed in steps S681 to S689 is the same as the processing described in steps S641 to S648 in FIG. 58 except for the processing in step S688, so details will be omitted and only a simple flow will be described.

  First, the precursor game number is subtracted (step S681), and it is determined whether the precursor game number has become 0 (step S682). If the precursor game number is 0, the precursor game flag is turned OFF (step S683), a special state transition lottery is performed (step S684), and it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode is won. (Step S685), when the transition to the special mode is won, the special condition game number lottery is performed (step S686), and the number of games selected is set to the "special condition game number" (step S687). After the state flag is turned ON (step S689), the instruction function generation process is ended. However, since the transition from the hell state to the special mode is performed at this time, a process of turning off the hell state flag is additionally performed between step S687 and step S689 (step S688).

  In addition, when it is determined that the transition to the special mode is not won in the process of step S685, the state transition lottery C is performed (step S690). Here, the state transition lottery C is to draw the transition destination of the AT lottery gaming state, similarly to the state transition lottery A described in step S638 of FIG. However, in this example, in the state transition lottery C, the transition to the low certainty state is determined with a probability of 100%, whereby the next game is forcibly dropped to the low certainty state with low degree of advantage.

  Here, the situation in which the process of step S690 is performed is that when the AT internal flag is OFF (NO in step S602) and the hell state flag is ON (NO in step S662), the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S682). YES), and further, when the transition to the special state is denied in the special state transition lottery (NO in step S685). To explain in a specific gaming situation, transition to the special mode after the end of the admonition effect, the admonition effect was performed again by having won the rare role during the special mode (while being controlled to the hell mode) Regardless, it corresponds to the time when the AT was not won, and in this case, in this case, forced to the low certainty state after the end of the admonition effect after the special mode (ie, at the end of the hell mode) Migrate to

  In the first embodiment, winning the rare role which is a high expectation role during the special mode (in the aspect of the AT lottery game state, it means being controlled to the hell state) is a mere precursor game. It is a game situation that is extremely advantageous for the player compared with transition and transition to the special mode thereafter (however, transition to a mere precursor game and the special mode is also advantageous game situation for the player) is there). However, in spite of being able to reach such a highly advantageous gaming situation, if it is not possible to win the special game (AT) as a result, the degree of advantage is significantly lower than that of other gaming states. I try to fall down. That is, in the present embodiment, in spite of the fact that the game situation with a very high degree of interest (the rare part winning in the special mode) is revealed, if an advantageous result (AT winning) can not be obtained, it is reactive. By setting it in the worst state (low probability state), the game machine can be realized with crispness without making the player only a specification that is sweet. In addition, from the viewpoint of the hall side, a gaming machine having only modes advantageous to the player (specifically, a precursor mode, a special mode, a precursor effect after the special mode, etc.) is less likely to cause a disadvantage to the hall. However, if the result of the extremely advantageous gaming situation ends in failure (AT not won), it is possible to secure a profit on the hall side by shifting to the worst state. Also, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game period controlled to the special state is shorter on average than other general AT lottery game states (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability state) Game balance can be maintained.

  After the state transition lottery C in step S690 is performed, processing is performed to turn off the hell state flag in order to shift from the previous hell state to the gaming state selected in the state transition lottery C (step S691). After the state flag (that is, the low probability state flag) corresponding to the state of the transition destination selected in the state transition lottery C is turned ON (step S692), the instruction function generation process is ended.

  As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the instruction function generation processing (step S61 of FIG. 57) by the main substrate 409 is performed, and based on the result of the processing, FIG. The processing after step S62 of the indicated function processing shown is performed.

  The instruction function generation process performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the contents of each process described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, and may be processes based on various derived patterns as described below. It can be replaced. In addition, in [11-3-3] described later, derived patterns of the instruction function generation process will be described as instruction function generation processes of the second example and the third example.

  For example, in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, it is determined whether the precursor game flag is ON or not (more strictly, whether the number of precursor games is 0 in the precursor game) as the determination trigger to the special mode. Although a lottery has been drawn (for example, steps S632, S642, S644 in FIG. 58), the prognostic game is provided with strong and weak (strong and weak omens) as an example of a derived pattern of instruction function generation processing. The transition to the special mode may be facilitated. By doing this, it is possible to appropriately adjust the degree of transition to the special mode, so that the playability of the slot machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Also, the timing of state transition based on the special state transition lottery and the lottery result is not limited to when the number of precursor games becomes 0, for example, the special state transition lottery is performed at an appropriate timing during the precursor game. It may be possible to shift to the special mode. In such a case, the precursor game and the subsequent special mode are combined to look like a series of "precursor modes", and the precursor game and the special mode are different from those shown in FIGS. 58 and 59. Can be configured. Specifically, assuming that a game period of 32 games is selected as the "precursor mode" and the precursor game is being executed therein, if the special state transition lottery is won in the middle of the precursor game, the precursor game is started. By switching to the special mode, the remaining game period of the "precursor mode" can be set to the special mode. At this time, even if the omen game ends as a moth ace, the special mode will be in a game state with a higher degree of advantage than before execution of a moth ace, so if you can shift to the special mode at an early timing, the period of the special mode will be long Continued, you can increase the degree of expectation for AT winning. On the contrary, if the timing to shift from the precursor game to the special mode is delayed, the display of the AT winning result by the precursor effect performed in the precursor game is expected to be long and the AT winning is newly made by the special mode controlled thereafter. I can have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the precursor game is performed without transition to the special state by adjusting distribution of the lottery table regarding transition to the precursor game (prediction effect) and the subsequent special mode (special state). If the winning combination that triggers the execution of the precursor game is a rare combination, the pattern in which the AT winning is notified only by the omen effect of the inside is 1⁄2, and the winning combination that becomes the trigger of execution of the precursor game is the rare combination If it is other than (non-rare role), it can be 100% (may be almost 100%). By doing this, when a non-rare character that is normally difficult to win the AT is selected, it is possible to significantly increase the expectation of winning to the AT when it is developed into a precursor game (or presentation effect).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 59, as described in step S663, when the rare combination (low winning combination) is selected as the winning combination during the special mode, the occurrence of the precursor game is favored, but the present implementation The slot machine 1 in the form does not have to be limited to the winning of the role of rare in the transition from the special mode to the generation of the precursor game. For example, even if a non-rare character (high winning character combination) is selected as a winning combination in the special mode, the distribution may be made to an extent that can be expected to occur in the precursor game. Specifically, for example, the winning combination is Bell (You may regard the pushing order of the rare character and the pushing order of the non-rare together as a "bell" or the pushing order of the non-rare may be regarded as the main "bell") Sometimes, the occurrence of the precursor game may be determined by 70% or more. Also, the AT first hit in the special mode (step S 661 in FIG. 59) may be distributed to such an extent that AT winning can be expected even when winning a high winning combination (eg, bell), for example, the winning combination is Bell. At the same time, the AT may be won by 50% or more. At this time, in the distribution table illustrated in FIG. 63, the winning value corresponding to the pushing order bell may be changed. By doing this, even in the special mode, even if it is a high winning combination which can not be expected very much for the occurrence of a precursor game or AT winning, it is possible to achieve a winning combination which can be fully expected. be able to.

  However, as mentioned above, when the high winning combination is included in the preferential targets for the occurrence of a prophetic game from the special mode and AT winning, the degree of advantage of the special mode becomes extremely high, so balance of the overall payout rate etc. From the viewpoint of maintaining, it is preferable to extremely shorten the special mode game period (the number of games controlled to the special state). By doing this, while raising the generation of the precursor game from the special mode and the expectation of AT winning, while shortening the game period of the special mode, the player's sense of expectation for the short special mode is obtained. It can be further enhanced.

  When the game period (number of games) of the special mode is extremely shortened as described above, the specific number of games can be determined, for example, as follows.

  First, as a first example, in a case where the push order bell is selected as a target of the high winning combination, an integer value based on the reciprocal of the win probability of the push order bell is set as the game period of the special mode. According to the lottery table of winning combinations shown in FIG. 49, in the gaming state other than the bonus state (general state, bonus internal state), the winning rate of the push order bell is about 0.49 (calculated from 32000/65535) Thus, its reciprocal is about 2.04. Therefore, "2" is adopted when adopting an integer value approximating the reciprocal as an integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of push order bell, and "3" when adopting an integer value rounded up after the decimal point of the reciprocal. It becomes.

  When the game period of the special mode is "2 games", the number of games is the number of games that the player can feel that they can win a predetermined winning combination (in this case, pushing order bell) within the game period. Therefore, the effect of enhancing the player's willingness to play and the sense of expectation can be expected. In addition, when the game period of the special mode is “3 games”, theoretically, the number of games that can be won in a predetermined winning combination (in this case, pushing order bell) within the game period (ie, Since the expectation value for winning is one or more), the possibility that a bonus (generation of a precursor game or AT winning) is given after the special mode can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced.

  Next, as a second example, in the case of using push order bell and replay among the high winning combinations as a target of preferential treatment, the winning probability of selecting a winning combination to be a target of preferential treatment becomes higher than in the first example (see FIG. According to 49, the probability that the push order bell or replay is won is about 0.63 in the general state and about 0.96 in the bonus internal state). Also, for example, "one game" is limited. When the game period of the special mode is "one game", the game is controlled by the special mode and given the opportunity to reverse the failure result only in the next game in which the failure result by the gasse precursor is shown, so the player's game You can boost your motivation rapidly.

[11-3-3-2. Effects of Instruction Function Generation Processing in First Example]
In addition, the slot machine 1 performs other effects as described below when the instruction function generation process (the instruction function generation process of the first example) as described in the above [11-3-1] is performed. Can be realized.

  First, according to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation processing of the first example, "in the gaming machine capable of executing the expectation effect to be expected for the transition to the advantageous game, it is performed in the predetermined game period Even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the expected effect, in a relatively short game period after the predetermined game period, transition to a special game state (special mode) that is more advantageous than a plurality of normal game states Can be realized.

  The above-mentioned "expected effect" corresponds to the "prediction effect" described in the instruction function generation process of the first example. In the command function generation process of the first example, "precursor effect" can be executed to suggest or instruct the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game), and it has been described in step S624 etc. of FIG. As described above, the precursor game in which the precursor effect is performed includes a precursor sign indicating transition to the AT game (AT winning) and a false flag indicating not to shift to the AT game (AT non-winning). Further, the precursor game can be said to be a continuous effect game which is played in a delay period from the game in which the lottery for AT game transition (AT first hit lottery) is performed to the game in which the result is displayed.

  Then, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, even after the AT first hit lottery is performed, a false alarm is executed and, as a result, the transition to the AT game is denied, the special mode ( Transition to a special state). Specifically, when winning in the special state transition lottery shown in step S644 in FIG. 58, this corresponds to transition to the special mode (special state). When the process of step S 644 is performed, the slot machine 1 is in a situation where the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 while the AT is not won (internally not elected). That is, it is possible to shift to the special mode when the gassing precursor has been performed and ended (see FIG. 74 for the lottery table).

  Furthermore, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the special state controlled when winning in the special state transition lottery is another AT lottery game state (so-called, normal, as described in FIG. 63 etc. The game corresponds to the gaming state, and specifically, the player is expected to win the first hit of the AT compared to the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state). It can be said that it is an advantageous mode (special mode). In the example shown in FIG. 63, if the winning combination is “ra” when controlled to a special state, the AT first hit with a fairly high probability of at least about 84% (55000/65535) Can be elected. However, in the command function generation process of the first example, the situation in which the game is played in the “special mode” is the non-AT state, and the superiority of the “special mode” is not as high as the special gaming state (AT state).

  In addition, the point that the period transitioned to the special mode is “relatively short game period” is, for example, more special than the average stay game number in the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state which is the normal gaming state. This is based on the fact that the number of games controlled by the mode (the number of special state games) is small, but this detailed description will be described later.

  From the above, the slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the first example is performed is “in the gaming machine capable of executing a precursor effect to be expected for the transition to the advantageous game, the transition to the advantageous game by the precursor effect Even if is denied, the player can shift to the special mode advantageous to the player. In the conventional gaming machine, when the outcome of the admonition effect ends in failure (AT non-winning), the game value spent for squeezing the admonition of the admonition effect is wasted for the player As a result, there is a problem that the player's sense of loss is heightened and the interest is reduced. However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, as described above, since the transition to the special mode advantageous to the player can be made even after the gassing precursor, consumption due to the gassed precursor Since it is possible to compensate (compensate) the game value played, and to control the sense of loss of the game value due to a false alarm, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, three types of low probability state, high probability state, and super high probability state are cited as AT lottery game states before the precursor game (prediction effect) is started. However, special states (special states 1 to 3) can be more advantageous for AT than any of those states (see FIG. 63). According to the slot machine 1 when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the omen effect, it is more advantageous than before the omen effect is performed. It is possible to shift to a special mode (for example, a special state), and it is possible to provide a gaming state having a high degree of expectation rather than the occurrence of a false alarm. Originally, the anticipation was a result of not being connected to the advantageous game (for example, AT game), which could discourage the player, but the slot in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed According to the machine 1, it is possible to provide an expected value that can compensate for the gaming value consumed by the player for the gasses aura by connecting to the special mode with a high degree of expectation through the gasses aura.

  In addition, in the first example of the indication function generation process, even during the presence of a false alarm having a result of denying the transition to the advantageous game, the state regarding the advantageous game (corresponding to the AT lottery game state) We can perform transition lottery. Specifically, this corresponds to the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. In this state transition lottery A, the state transition is lottery using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 71 to FIG. 73 based on the AT lottery gaming state controlled at that time, but when viewing the distribution, The promotion probability of transitioning to the advantageous state from the point of time is set higher than the probability of demotion to the disadvantageous state from the point of time except when controlled to the topmost super high certainty state at the point of time. For example, in FIG. 71, since it is a state transition lottery from the lowest certainty state, it is not demoted. Also, for example, in FIG. 72, the rate of demoting to the low confidence state is 600/65535 even when winning the most probable non-rare role, while the percentage of promotion to the super high confidence state is 63625/65535. The rate of promotion is overwhelmingly high.

  As described above, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, not only can the state transition lottery be performed while the gasse apoplexy is being performed, but also the advantage can be increased by the state transition lottery. Even if the game is executed and the transition to the advantageous game is denied, it can be expected that the transition to the state of high advantage to compensate for the loss caused by the negative result and the player's willingness to play decreases. It exerts the suppressing effect.

  In the first example of the indication function generation process, the AT lottery game state (low probability state, high probability state) which can be normally controlled in a specific game in which the remaining precursor game number becomes 0 when a false alarm is performed Since it is possible to make a transition lottery to a special mode more advantageous than the super high certainty state), when the lottery is won, a lottery table (lottery table for special state) which is advantageous in the subsequent games is used. It is possible to make a transition lottery to the advantageous game (AT first hit lottery). Specifically, the transition lottery to the special mode corresponds to the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59, and the subsequent transition lottery to the advantageous game is step S661 in FIG. It corresponds to the first AT per lottery. That the lottery table according to the AT lottery game state is used in the AT first hit lottery is as shown in FIG. 105, and according to FIG. 105, any of the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state It can be seen that the special states 1 to 3 have a higher probability of winning an AT first hit than the special states 1 to 3.

  In addition, in step S644 in FIG. 58 and step S684 in FIG. 59, it has been described that the special state transition lottery is performed when the remaining precursor game number is 0, but in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the remaining The special state transition lottery may be performed when the number of prognostic games is 0, without limitation when it is 0. By doing this, it is possible to execute the state transition lottery (special state transition lottery) even in the middle of the gasse, so even if it is in the gasse, it is more advantageous than the current AT lottery game state Even if the transition to (special mode) becomes possible and the shift to advantage games can not be expected to be executed, all investments in gaming value (medal) required to digest the shift will be wasted. Can be expected to have the effect of compensating for the investment.

  In other words, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, transition to a special mode (for example, a special state) in which a good lottery table is used in a specific game during a sign (or immediately after a sign) It has the feature of being able to make a lottery.

  Also, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, the period controlled to the special mode is “relatively short game period (relatively short period)”, and the game period is a normal gaming state (low probability) State, high certainty state, ultra high certainty state) shorter than the controlled period. Specifically, as described in the state transition lottery A of the instruction function generation process (for example, step S638 in FIG. 58), when the lottery tables in FIG. 49 and FIG. The average number of stay games in the confirmed state is about 120 games, the average number of stay games in the high state is about 25 games, and the average number of stay games in the high state is about 36 games. On the other hand, since the number of staying games in the special state (special state 1 to special state 3) is selected from among 2 games to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), it is more than each state in the normal gaming state. It is a short period. Then, according to the slot machine 1 in which such instruction function generation processing is performed, the comparison is made when the precursor game favoring the player is a garbled precursor (that is, when the transition to the AT game is denied). Since the game can shift to such a special state for a short period of time, even if the expectation effect in the precursor game ends in a failure result, the special state can provide an opportunity for re-chance. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the first example is performed, it is possible to realize the game characteristics different from the game characteristics in the conventional game machine in which the adjective state and the normal state are repeated. The effect is that it is difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, when the rare combination which is the high expectation combination (the low winning combination from the viewpoint of the winning probability) is selected as the winning combination in the above-mentioned special state, Although the precursor game is started again with probability (100% in the explanation of FIG. 59), when the precursor game ends in failure, the gaming state after the precursor game is low in the degree of advantage. It is forcibly dropped to the sure state (see state transition lottery C in step S690 in FIG. 59). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generation process is performed, even if an advantageous precursor game ends in a failure, the player is elected as a high expectation player (low winning combination) in a relatively short period thereafter. In this way, a plurality of situations advantageous to the player can be provided in a multiplexed manner (or continuously), since it is possible to control the advantageous special mode in which the precursor game can be reappeared. However, on the other hand, despite the provision of such multiple advantageous situations, if those results are unsuccessful (not transition to the AT game), the subsequent gaming state is Since the player is forced to drop to a low certainty state (in this example, the lowest game state) with a low degree of advantage, the game machine is provided not only as a sweet-only game machine but also considering the hole side profit. Can.

  Also, from the viewpoint of securing profits on the hall side, the special state is a game state that is advantageous for the player (that is, disadvantageous for the hall side), so it is possible for the hall side that the period controlled to the special state is too long. Although not preferable, in the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the period controlled to the special state as described above is the normal gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, super high probability) Since the number of staying games is shorter than the average number of staying games, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage on the hole side.

  In the first example of the indication function generation process, the transition to the special mode (special state) is drawn by the special state transition lottery as described in FIG. 58 or FIG. 59, but whether to shift to the special mode The degree of expectation of may be indicated by points or the like to be suggested to the player. In addition, the timing which provides a point etc. is not specifically limited. In addition, such suggestion effects may be performed not by the main substrate 409 but by the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510). And, when such a suggestive effect is performed, it can be expected to enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, when the special mode as described in FIG. 58 or FIG. ) May be performed. In the special state suggestive effect, for example, the content of the continuous effect (content of the precursor effect to be restored) which may occur when the player is elected in the special mode may be suggested. In addition, when the special state indication effect is executed, the continuous effect with a high degree of expectation may be easily selected among the plurality of types of continuous effects. Specifically, taking the lottery tables of FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 as an example, weak effects (weak story) are produced when prognostic effects (continuous effects) occur after the special state suggestive effect is executed. Makes it easier to select strong direction (strong story, strong battle) than weak one). By doing this, it is possible to enhance the player's interest only by the special state suggestion effect appearing.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the first example, "a gaming machine capable of executing any of a plurality of effects including a specific effect indicating the determination result regarding the transition to the advantageous game" In the game after the specific effect is executed, a game machine capable of executing the predetermined effect of the previous stage before the success or failure result of the specific effect is indicated can also be realized.

  The above "specific effect" corresponds to the "continuous effect" described in the instruction function generation process of the first example, and "before the result of the specific effect is indicated in the game after the specific effect is executed, The state in which the predetermined effect of the stage is executed is, for example, a precursor game to be executed again based on the winning of the rare role in the “special mode” or the “special mode” described in the instruction function generation processing Alternatively, it corresponds to the continuous rendering in the precursor game or the like.

  To explain in more detail, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example described in [11-3-1], “continuous effect” is produced in the precursor effect performed in the precursor game, It is possible to teach the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game) (see the description of step S624 and the like in FIG. 58). The precursor effect including the continuous effect is included in a precursor sign indicating transition to an AT game (AT winning) or a Gasse precursor indicating not transitioning to an AT game (AT non-winning). Therefore, the continuous rendition to be performed on the arsenal does not indicate a transition to advantageous gaming.

  The “continuous effect” may be completed in one game to teach whether to shift to an AT game, but in many cases, continuous effects are performed across multiple games. In addition, in the case where “precursor effect” in the first embodiment is regarded as one of “continuous effect”, it is an effect which is always performed over a plurality of games. Furthermore, "a plurality of games" here may be configured as a game (so-called, main game) in which an internal lottery concerning the winning combination is performed once for each game, or in a pseudo manner during one main game. It may be configured by a game (so-called, simulated game) that creates a plurality of game modes, or may be a mixture thereof.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine capable of producing continuous effects during the precursor game, if the result of the continuous effects is to deny the winning of the advantageous game, the interest of the player for a while after that There has been a considerable problem that the As a specific example, when a continuous effect in the precursor game is revealed by winning a rare role in a high probability state of AT winning, the player strongly expects the AT winning, but When the continuous production results in a failure result, the sense of expectation may drop sharply due to discouragement, and the reduced interest may not be restored immediately.

  On the other hand, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, in the slot machine 1, it is assumed that the result of the omen effect (continuous effect) does not indicate the winning (transition to AT) to the advantageous game. (That is, even if the admiral effect is a gasse arsenal), after the end of the arsenal, you can shift to the special mode that leads to the next accrual game occurrence, so when the failure result is shown in the first admonition effect It is possible to reproduce the effect of the previous stage than. In addition, since it is possible to execute the precursor game again based on, for example, winning the high expectation role (rare role) in the special mode after the abduction, the precursor effect in such a precursor game is It is possible to reproduce the state of the production of the previous stage more than when the failure result is shown in the first precursor production.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the first example is performed, the interest of the player is continuously made by the continuous effect showing a negative result as in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above. Even if continuous effects show the result of denying winning in advantageous games without lowering them, by making it possible to re-appear the effects of earlier stages before showing the result of success or failure in advantageous games The effect of suppressing the decrease in the player's interest is achieved.

  In the slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the first example as described above is performed, after the result of denying the winning of the advantageous game is shown in the "preceding continuous effects", Even if a "demonstration" appears, the outcome following the "preceding stage presentation" or "preceding stage presentation" does not necessarily indicate the winning result for the advantageous game, and the winning for the advantageous game is denied. Sometimes. When the "previous stage effect" appears by transitioning to the special mode after the end of the arsenal, whether or not the winning result for the advantageous game is shown is made during the special mode transition or during the special mode It is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, the winning combination).

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example as described above is performed, “preceding stage effect” means that the same effect as “the previous continuous effect” is reappeared. It may be any effect that can be suggested, and may not be the effect included in “the previous continuous effect”. And, even if "preceding stage effect" appears, it is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, a winning combination) whether the same effect as "the previous continuous effect" appears.

  Furthermore, the special state controlled in the special mode is also characterized in that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is higher than the state before execution of the continuous effect (for example, the low certainty state, the high certainty state, the super high certainty state) Since it has (see the description of FIG. 63), according to such a slot machine 1, the continuous effect can be controlled by controlling the gaming state in which the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is different before and after the continuous effect. Even if the result of does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until after the continuous effect.

  Also, in the conventional gaming machine, although the continuous effects that can be expected for transition to the advantageous game itself increase the player's sense of expectation, when the result of the continuous effects ends in failure (for example, AT non-winning) Had the aspect that the degree of expectation would fall at a stretch. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the first example, even if the result of the continuous effect does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game and the continuous effect in the gasse aura, Since the special modes that can be controlled (for example, special states) have a higher degree of advantage than before the appearance of continuous effects, even if the results of continuous effects fail, then create a higher expected state It has a remarkable effect in that it can That is, the failure result of the continuous presentation is not a mere end of the expectation period but a basis for a more superior high expectation period, thereby enhancing the interest of the player over multiple stages, and the player's expectation The effect is to maintain the feeling for a long time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, the transition ratio in which the transition to the special mode is made after the failure of the continuous effect is performed based on the effect mode of the continuous effect produced. The proportions may be differentiated. Specifically, for example, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased (high probability) when a continuous effect with a low degree of expectation appears, when the result of the continuous effect ends in failure. . In such a case, if a continuous effect with a low degree of expectation is produced, the player's expectation for the result of the continuous effect to be successful (to win the transition to the advantageous game) is relatively low. On the other hand, after that, the probability of shifting to the special mode having a higher degree of advantage than that before the appearance of the continuous effect is high, thereby enhancing the expectation of the player to the special mode, and as a result, the player's long term We can sustain our expectations.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the state transition lottery can be performed even during the execution of the continuous effect, and the specific game (for example, the final game) ), The state transition lottery can be performed using a lottery table which is better than the normal state transition lottery. Specifically, the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. 58 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed during the execution of the continuous effect. Also, the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59 corresponds to a state transition lottery performed using a table that is better than the normal state transition lottery in the specific game under continuous effect execution. . By doing this, in the slot machine 1, by allowing state transition lottery with different degrees of advantage during execution (including the end time) of the continuous effect, state transition regarding advantageous game during the execution of the continuous effect In addition to being expected in (state transition lottery A), in the specific game, it is possible to expect state transition (special state transition lottery) relating to the advantageous game in a situation with a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, while the continuous effect is produced, the player is expected not only to expect the outcome of the advantageous game transition indicated by the continuous effect but also to expect the winning of the advantageous game in the future by the state transition Thus, the effect of maintaining the player's willingness to play is exhibited.

  In particular, when the specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed is the final game of the continuous effect, whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the superior special mode in the game when transitioning to the special mode Not only can the player be entertained, but also in the game before transition, it is entertained to the player whether or not to transition to the advantageous game (AT transition) by the result of the continuous presentation until the final game of the continuous presentation In particular, the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, the state at the time of game start (for example, at the time of start operation of the start lever 210) of the next game of the final game A transition lottery may be made. Also in such a case, as in the case where the final game of the continuous effect as described above is a specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed, the transition to the advantageous game is made by the result of the continuous effect until the final game of the continuous effect Even if the player enjoys (at AT transition) whether or not the continuous effect is a result of failure, the special state transition lottery that can shift to the special state is performed thereafter, which is advantageous. Since it is possible to entertain the player as to whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the special mode, it is expected that the expectation of the player can be maintained over a long period of time and the interest can be particularly enhanced.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the special mode is displayed by performing screen preparation such as "in preparation for continuous effect" or "if you draw a rare role now?" Even if the continuous effect in the precursor game executed before the transition to the special mode ends in a failure result, the player can be greatly expected that the precursor game and the continuous effect will be generated again. It is possible to suppress discouragement of the player due to the failure result.

  When the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “special mode” is not a mere effect mode, but a winning probability etc. (for example, AT first hit probability) for a special game or a special state. It is a mode that is favored. For example, in the case of the instruction function generation processing described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59, etc., if the winning combination in the "special mode" is the "rea role", the preferential treatment such as winning always at the first AT hit etc. Measures are in place. Further, in the "special mode", since the probability that the precursor effect (which may be replaced with the continuous effect) may be re-generated is also set high, the expectation to the AT winning by the re-generation of the continuous effect may be increased. it can. With regard to the gaming state controlled in such a "special mode", the following case may be considered in the case of the instruction function generation process of AT described in [11-3-1].

  The first case is a case in which a state capable of transitioning only when a specific condition is satisfied, and a state selected using a dedicated lottery table are set. Specifically, the "special modes 1 to 3" shown in FIG. As described in the description of FIG. 63 and the like, “special states 1 to 3” can be shifted only when a specific condition in the precursor game is satisfied, and are selected using a dedicated lottery table. It is AT lottery game state. Since the slot machine 1 can use a special gaming state which is not selected in other situations when a special special gaming state is thus set in the "special mode", the row in the "special mode" The superiority of the game being played can be made extremely high.

  The second case is not limited to the case where the specific condition is established, but is a case where any one of the states that can be shifted from the normal time is set. Specifically, for example, the "super high probability state" shown in FIG. The "very high confidence state" is an AT lottery game status that can be shifted between the low confidence state and the high confidence state from the normal time, but among them, it is the highest status as an advantage, so " It is also preferable as an AT lottery game state controlled in the special mode. When the "super high probability state" is selected by the state transition lottery performed in the predetermined game of the continuous effect, the game in the "special mode" is started. In the slot machine 1, by setting a specific gaming state that can be transferred from the normal time in the "special mode" as described above, it is possible to suppress an increase in the necessary memory area by preparing a new dedicated gaming state. And, while suppressing the processing amount by the CPU 1110, a wide range of game characteristics can be realized.

  In addition, when the command function generation process of the first example is performed, a predetermined lottery (specifically, the special state transition lottery of step S644 of FIG. 58 or step S684 of FIG. 59) is performed, after the continuous effect. Although transition to the special mode may be made, the degree of expectation for whether to transition to the special mode may be indicated by points or the like to be suggested to the player. In addition, the timing which provides a point etc. is not specifically limited. In addition, such suggestion effects may be performed not by the main substrate 409 but by the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510). Then, when such a suggestive effect is performed, it can be expected to enhance the player's interest in the transition to the special mode.

  Then, in the processing for instructing function generation in the first example, in the processing flow after winning the special state transition lottery shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. When the control of (i.e., transition to the special mode) is determined, the transition to the special mode is immediately made after the end of the continuous rendering. Further, as described above, in the special mode, control is performed in a state different from that before the execution of the continuous effect (more advanced state). As described above, by immediately shifting to the special mode after the continuous rendering, the slot machine 1 can change the degree of expectation on the game before and after the execution of the continuous rendering, and can suppress the decline in the player's sense of expectation. it can. In particular, in the case where the degree of expectation after execution is higher than that before the continuous effect, the player's sense of expectation can be strongly maintained.

  Further, in step S644 in FIG. 58 and step S684 in FIG. 59, the processing example for performing the special state transition lottery when the number of remaining precursor games at the time of the anticipation is 0 has been described, but in this processing example, the precursor game Since the continuous effect (part of the accompaniment effect) is always performed during the operation, the situation where the number of remaining accompaniment games is 0 means the final game of the continuous effect. According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the transition control to the special mode is determined in the final game of continuous effect, but in this case, the transition to the special mode is made before the final game ( That is, since the loss due to the continuous rendering is not determined and displayed, it is possible for the player to enjoy the possibility of winning against the continuous rendering (AT transition winning).

[11-3-3. Another Example of Instruction Function Generation Processing (Second Example, Third Example)]
Next, another example (second example, third example) of the instruction function generation process in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The command function generation process of the second and third examples is described in [11-3-1] in the control process of the gaming state (AT lottery game state) mainly determined by the command function generation process. Since the feature is different from the designated function generation process (the designated function generation process of the first example), the description of the same configuration and process as the first example is omitted to avoid duplication, and differences will be mainly described. .

  FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation process of each example. Specifically, FIG. 79A shows a transition example in the indication function generation processing of the first example, and FIG. 79B shows a transition example in the indication function generation processing of the second example, and FIG. C) shows a transition example in the indication function generation process of the third example. FIG. 79 shows the gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) controlled along with the passage of time and the degree of expectation thereof. The degree of expectation here is mainly the degree of expectation for winning a special game (transition to AT), and in FIG. 79 means that the higher the value in the vertical axis is, the higher the expected value, and the lower the expectation. It means that the value is low. In addition, a plurality of points (a1 to a5, b1 to b5, and c1 to c7) in the figure indicate characteristic timings in the respective transition examples. In the following, the control of the characteristic gaming state in the instruction function generation process of the second example and the third example will be respectively described in comparison with the control of the game state in the instruction function generation process of the first example.

  First, the transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation process of the first example will be described along the transition example shown in FIG. 79A while showing the correspondence with each process of FIGS. 58 and 59. In FIG. 79 (A), the game is started from the normal gaming state in which the AT is not won (the internal AT is not elected), and at this time, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the low certainty state. Then, at a1 in the middle of the normal gaming state, as a result of the state transition lottery (step S639 in FIG. 58), the AT lottery gaming state has shifted to the high probability state.

  Thereafter, the game proceeds in the normal gaming state, and in a2, the winning combination of the rare role is selected, and the like, and the winning lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) is won, whereby the prognostic game (proactive game A) is started. The However, it is assumed that the precursor game A started at a2 is a false precursor that has not been won in the first AT hit. When the precursor game A of the ad-vantage a is started at a2, the state transition lottery A is performed for the transition of the AT lottery gaming state (step S638 in FIG. 58), but it is assumed here that the high probability state continues.

  In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state is not particularly different from the normal gaming state while the precursor game A is performed by the agile precursor. Then, at a3, although the prognostic game number determined by the prognostic game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has passed and the prognostic game A is ended, the special state transition lottery performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58) If the player has won the transition to the special mode, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (one of the special states 1 to 3), etc., and the game in the special mode is immediately started (FIG. 58). Step S648). In addition, while being controlled to the special mode, it is possible that the game is performed with a higher degree of advantage than the previous normal state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra high probability state) [11-3-3 -1].

  Next, at a4, in the special mode game started from a3, it is assumed that a prognostic game (prognostic game B) is started when the winning combination of the rare role is selected, etc. (step S666 in FIG. 59). In addition, the precursor game A started at a4 is assumed to be a Gasse precursor that has not won the AT first hit. When a false acclaim precursor game B is started at a4, the transition to the AT lottery game state is controlled to the hell state by turning off the special state flag and turning on the hell state flag (FIG. 59). Steps S669 and S670).

  When the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the game controlled to the hell state does not win the AT first hit lottery (or the lottery table which is hard to win is used), and the precursor game number lottery During the precursor game number determined in (Step S664 in FIG. 59), the precursor game B is executed.

  Then, at a5, the precursor game B ends, and in the final game, the result of the AT non-winning is notified by the precursor effect (continuous effect), and thereafter, the game returns to the normal gaming state. If the precursor game B is a true precursor in the case of winning the AT first hit, a transition to an AT game (AT winning) is notified at time a5, and then the AT game is started.

  Next, the transition of the AT lottery game state in the command function generation process of the second example will be described along the transition example of FIG. 79 (B).

  In the command function generation process of the second example, when the execution of the expected effect over a plurality of games indicating the success or failure of transition to the advantageous game state is determined, the expected effect is generated by the internal lottery performed during the expected effect. It is characterized by suppressing the establishment of another opportunity that may lead to execution. The slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed has an execution form corresponding to the expected effect for which execution is determined when the expected effect is performed triggered by a certain internal lottery result. The object of the present invention is to suppress the influence, and in the case where the executability of the expected effect is determined based on the result of the internal lottery such as the winning combination lottery, it is possible to realize the purpose of treating the result of the internal lottery carefully.

  In the command function generation process of the second example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when execution of the expected effect is determined as a specific control example of the gaming state for achieving the above-described purpose. Subsequently, the lottery state is controlled to the low expectation state (for example, the hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter to suppress the transition to the advantageous gaming state.

  First, since the process of b1 shown in FIG. 79 (B) is the same as a1 of FIG. 79 (A), the description will be omitted. Next, in b2 of FIG. 79 (B), a protagonist game A of a forerunner is started by having been elected to the forerunner lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) by, for example, selecting the winning combination of the rare combination. Here, in the command function generation process of the second example, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low expected state (specifically, a hell state, for example) while the precursor game A by the agile precursor is performed. By controlling to the hell state, even if the rare role is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination performed during the precursor game A, it is possible not to select the AT winning or the execution of a new precursor game, etc. .

  Then, at b3, when the precursor game number determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and the precursor game A is ended, the special state transition lottery performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58) If winning in the transition to the special mode, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (any one of the special states 1 to 3), and the game in the special mode is immediately started (step S648 in FIG. 58). . Note that, during the special mode, the game is performed in a state where the degree of advantage is higher than that in the normal state (low probable state, high probable state, ultra high probable state) up to that point. It is similar.

  After that, when execution of the precursor game B is determined during the special mode game, the precursor game B is started at b4, and when the precursor game B is ended after the precursor game number has passed at b5, the precursor game B The result (AT not won / AT won) is shown. The processing of this series of flows is the same as a4 and a5 in FIG.

  In addition, the indication function generation process of the second example is not limited to the process for realizing the transition example shown in FIG. The other processing may be to control the game state so that it is difficult to win the advantageous game state for the execution period of the prognostic effect and the continuous effect).

  When the command function generation process of the second example is performed, the slot machine 1 relates to the gaming state at any predetermined timing from when the execution of the expected effect is determined to when the expected effect is ended. The lottery state can be dropped to a low expectation state.

  Next, transition of the AT lottery game state in the command function generation process of the third example will be described along the transition example of FIG. 79 (C).

  In the command function generation process of the third example, when the expectation effect indicating the success or failure of transition to the advantageous gaming state is executed, the advantageous winning combination (corresponding to “high expected role”) having high expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state Specifically, for example, when the combination of the rare role) is selected as the winning combination, it is possible to execute another expected presentation triggered by the fact that the advantageous winning combination is selected, while teaching the result by the expectation presentation. It is characterized by In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the execution mode of the expectation effect is based on another internal lottery result, when the expected effect is executed triggered by a certain internal lottery result. In the case of winning another execution of expectation based on the above-mentioned other internal lottery result, for example, both of the previous expectation and the other expectation are It is a gaming machine capable of realizing control that respects.

  In the command function generation process of the third example, as a specific control example of the game state for achieving the above-described purpose, as shown in FIG. 79C, execution of the expected effect (the previous expected effect) When execution of another expectation production (following expectation production) is determined, the execution of the previous expectation production is continued, and after the result by the expectation production is displayed at the end, the later expectation production is performed. To make it run.

  First, since the process of c1 shown in FIG. 79 (C) is the same as c1 of FIG. 79 (A), the description will be omitted. Next, in c2 of FIG. 79 (C), the precursor game A of a forerunner is started by having been elected to the forerunner lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) by, for example, selecting the winning combination of the rare combination. Here, in the indication function generation process of the third example, special transition control such as the indication function generation process of the second example regarding the AT lottery gaming state is performed (specifically, the hell while the precursor game A is performed by a false alarm) It is assumed that state transition lottery A is performed as in the case of the instruction function generation process of the first example without performing transition control to the state).

  After that, it is assumed that the winning combination of the rare combination is selected in c3 of the prognostic game A being executed. At this time, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, assuming that the precursor lottery based on the rare combination is performed and the new precursor game (the precursor game C) is won by the precursor lottery, the execution of the precursor game C is A process of delaying at least after the end of the precursor game A is performed. At this time, although a precursor game number lottery for the precursor game C is also performed, the selected precursor game number is set to variable data different from the precursor game number corresponding to the currently running precursor game A. In addition, the prognostic game C is assumed to be a prose that is not elected in the first AT hit, and a state transition lottery based on the combination of the rare role (for example, state transition lottery A) is performed in c3. Suppose that you are promoted to high confidence state.

  Then, at c4, the number of prognostic games determined by the prognostic game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and prognostic game A ends, and at the end, the prognostic game A results (AT Transition non-winning) is taught. Thus, at c4, the precursor game A is ended, but since the precursor game C whose execution is delayed at c3 is stocked, the precursor game C is started. In FIG. 79 (c), at the start of the precursor game C from the end of the precursor game A, a special lottery is not performed regarding the AT lottery game state.

  Note that, as one of the processes included in the command function generation process of the third example, a predetermined connection period may be provided between c4 and the start of the precursor game C from the end of the precursor game A, and further, Alternatively, it may be possible to guess the start of the precursor game C in the connection period, or the like.

  Then, the acclaimed acclaimed accompaniment game C is played until the accrual game number determined by the accrual game number drawing has passed, and at the end of that, the result of AT non-winning is notified by a prognostic effect (continuous effect). Then, at c5, if it is determined that the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the precursor game C and the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the special state (one of special states 1 to 3). The game in the special mode is immediately started.

  Next, in c6 of the special mode game started in c5, when the execution of the precursor game (precursor game B) is determined on the occasion that the winning combination of the rare character is selected, the precursor game B It is started. Then, as shown at c7, when the precursor game B is a garbled antecedent, the outcome of AT non-winning is notified by the precursor effect (continuous effect) at the end of the end of the number of precursor games, and then it returns to the normal gaming state . In addition, when the precursor game B is a precursor, transition to an AT game (AT winning) is notified at time c7, and then the AT game is started.

  Supplementing the process of FIG. 79 (C), the number of precursor games determined in advance is the number of precursor games determined in advance when the player plays a trigger for the precursor game C during execution of the precursor game A (Gasse antecedent). The precursor game A is continued without being changed, and after the precursor game A ends, the precursor game C is started. Specifically, for example, when the number of precursor games of the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, even if the player holds the rare role in the tenth game (the remaining six games), the remaining six games are the precursor game A It will continue.

  The command function generation process of the third example is not limited to the process for realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79 (C), but is performed by “expected effect (corresponding to precursor effect or continuous effect in the prognostic game) It may be other processing such as "makes it possible to execute another expectation effect that is triggered by the selection of the advantageous winning combination (high expectation combination, rare combination), while teaching the result. The following shows some other processing examples.

  First, in the command function generation process of the third example, when an opportunity leading to the execution of another expectation effect is established during the execution of the expected effect (a rare role of determining the execution of the precursor game C during the execution of the precursor game A) When the precursor game C is executed, the number of precursor games for which the precursor game C is executed may be drawn in the establishment game of the trigger as described in FIG. When the accompaniment effect is over, the accrual game number lottery may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 79 (C), when it is decided to execute another cassette a precursor (a precursor game C) triggered by having won the high expectation role (for example, a role of a player) during the cassette ad (a precursor game A), Although it is assumed that the precursor game C is executed in a mode in which the cassette is reset after the end of the previous cassette, if the player is elected to the role of the plural multiple times during the cassette, all the reels will be elected (However, Resetting the precursor game (Gasse omen) to the AT winning rare role does not include the threat game may continue indefinitely. In the third example of the indication function generation process, when the high expectation player is won multiple times in the precursor game (particularly, in the precursor of Gasse) in order to solve such a problem, the precursor game to be reset (Gasese precursor) The upper limit number of times may be limited. As a specific processing example for limiting the upper limit number of the precursor game (Gasse precursor) that is reset when multiple high expectation winning combinations are won in one precursor game (Gasse precursor), the upper limit number is Until reaching the high expectation role, it may be processed to determine the re-set of the precursor game every time it is won, or a plurality of winnings of the high expectation role in one precursor game are put together and the upper limit It may be processed to determine the number of precursor games to be reset within the number of times. Although the upper limit number of times can be set to any number, since the Gasseman apologizes for the disadvantage result for the player that AT is not won, the upper limit is also possible to prevent repeated adverse effects. It is desirable to set the number of times to at least one.

  In addition, in the third example of the indication function generation process, the high expectation player with high expectation among the high expectation player among the high expectation player (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, strong chance eye, etc.) If the player) is elected multiple times, after the end of the current gasse precursor, the gasse precursor may be forced to be reset. Specifically, if the player of the aura game A is elected to the strong character rare role multiple times, even if the execution of the aura game C is not determined by the precursor lottery based on each strong rare game winning, the aura game After the end of A, the precursor game C may be forced to be executed. In addition, the number of times of winning of the top high expectation player for forcibly resetting the precursor game can be set any number of times from once to a plurality of times.

  In the third example of the indication function generation process, the effect mode in the prognostic game (precursor game C) set after the end of the protagonist game (precursor game A) of the apocalypse is produced in the same manner as the mere prognostic game. Although the game may be played out, it may be made to appear in an effect mode that makes it possible to feel the relation with the precursor game A.

  For example, the precursor game C may be executed while showing that the precursor game A continues. In such a case, by not deleting the number of games of the precursor game A and the precursor game C, the game period allocated to both precursor games can be respected, and the appearance of the precursor game A is more than normal. Since the game can be viewed as being extended to a long number of games, it can be expected to maintain and improve the player's expectation as a special situation.

  Also, for example, the precursor game C may be started after the result of the precursor game A is always displayed by the continuous effect (replaceable with the precursor effect). In such a case, an effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game A is performed, thereby cherishing the winning combination (internal lottery result) that is the trigger for the execution of the precursor game A, and thereafter Since the effect (continuous effect) of determining the result by the precursor game C is performed at another timing of the above, the winning combination that is the trigger for the execution of the precursor game C can also be important. In addition, in the command function generation process of the third example, from the viewpoint of emphasizing the internal lottery result, the main stage is more than the presentation mode shown in the previous stage (the precursor game C as if the precursor game A continues). It is desirable to be controlled to the presentation mode shown in (which surely teaches the outcome of each precursor game).

  In the third example of the indication function generation process, as described above, when execution of the precursor game C is determined during execution of the precursor game A, the precursor game C is reset in a mode in which the precursor game is reset after the termination of the precursor game A. Time period until the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is determined (for example, when the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games) Regarding the remaining six games for the precursor game A when the execution of the precursor game C is determined, the result display shown in each precursor game A, C based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination (display of availability of AT transition) The period may be shortened to a predetermined extent within a range not inhibiting the In the above specific example, when the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is six, this corresponds to changing the number of remaining precursor games so as to end the precursor game A in three games. By performing such an instruction function generation process of the third example, expected effects based on the respective internal lottery results (corresponding to the predictive effects produced in the predictive game) are made executable, and the display of the results is taught. be able to. And since the start timing of the reset precursor game (early game C) can be advanced by shortening the running precursor game (early game A), each can be performed in a shorter time than when it is not shortened. The expectation effect can increase the player's interest.

[11-3-3-4. Effects of Instruction Function Generation Processing of Second Example]
According to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the second example, "the advantageous game advantageous to the player under the lottery state among any of the plurality of lottery states different in the expectation of winning will be performed. In the gaming machine, a transition to an advantageous gaming state in which a game is executed is randomly drawn, and an expected effect indicating the success or failure of transition to the advantageous game state is executed based on the result of the lottery over a plurality of games. Game machine that can make it possible to vary the appearance ratio of the expected effects so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effects in the game after the determined is there.

  The above-mentioned "advantage game state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the instruction function generation process of the second example, and similarly, the "expected effect" corresponds to the "prediction effect". In the command function generation process of the second example, the hell state flag is turned ON (step S59 in FIG. 59) triggered by the start of the precursor game period in which the omen effect is performed (steps S666 and S674 in FIG. 59). (S670), it is made to control to the hell state during the precursor game. When being controlled to the hell state, the winning of the new first AT hit is suppressed (see FIG. 63), so that the prognostic effects determined to be executed (even if not strictly determined, the prognostic game When the start is determined, it is possible to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the adverbial effect is determined to be performed. That is, since the appearance of a new precursor game is also suppressed by suppressing the winning of the new AT first hit in the hell state, the ratio of the appearance of the precursor effect is made variable in the direction of being suppressed. As a result, no new precursor game is generated during the precursor game, and it is possible to reveal the precursor effect relating to the precursor game in execution as the execution mode at the time of its execution decision.

  In addition, the game state that can be realized by performing the above-described “second example of the indication function generation process” is more specifically described as “one of the lottery states among the plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees. The transition to the advantageous gaming state in which the advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed under the lottery is drawn randomly, and expectation effects indicating the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous gaming state are executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the drawing. In the gaming machine to be played, when execution of the expected effect is determined, the lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state among a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees at a predetermined timing thereafter to enter the advantageous gaming state It can also be said that the gaming machine can maintain the sense of expectation for the expected effect regardless of the winning combination in the subsequent games by suppressing the shift. At this time, the "low expectation state" corresponds to the "hell state".

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when continuous effects across multiple games are executed, the player's interest is concentrated on the effects, so the inside of the winning combination performed in each game during the effects. There was a tendency to become alien to the result of the lottery.

  Also, in the conventional gaming machine, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed while continuous effects are being performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (for example, high expectation winning such as a rare combination) If a part is selected), another new effect will be generated and the current effect will be canceled, or another new effect will not be generated to continue the current effect, etc. There is a problem that the mode of execution of continuous rendition may be affected, and the player's expectation regarding these rendition changes (mainly falls).

  More specifically, when the preceding effect is canceled, it is known that the previous effect is a lost result at that time, and the player's sense of expectation is lowered. In addition, if a later effect is not generated, the player's expectation is still expected as a result that the high expectation winning combination has been chosen but the result is that the game has been dropped to a transition game to an advantage game such as AT is dropped. Decreases. In addition, when the previous effect is rounded up in the middle and the later effect occurs, the player's sense of expectation is also truncated because the result display by the earlier effect being rounded up is likely to be obscured. There is a risk of

  However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which treats the result of the internal lottery in each game carefully. In concrete processing, when the execution of the precursor game (especially, the arsenal) is determined, a low probability state (hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, the timing when the precursor game flag is turned on) By dropping it to), the result of the internal lottery performed during the precursor game can be prevented from leading to the expectation to the special game. This is to provide a game situation (rendering situation) that does not confuse the contents of development based on each lottery result by a plurality of lottery opportunities, and thus exerts an effect of carefully handling the results of the internal lottery in each game. Can.

  When the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “predetermined timing to drop to a low probability state (hell state)” can be classified as follows, and the effects are respectively obtained. I can expect it.

  First, if it is a predetermined timing that the game immediately after the execution of the Gasse apocalypse is decided or the start game of the Gasse aura is dropped to a low probability state (Hell state), during the subsequent games (before moving to the Gasse Aura) If any winning combination is won, including the case where some preparation period is provided, the expectation to the special game by the winning combination can be suppressed, and it becomes a judgment factor of the running gasse precursor. The importance to the winning combination can be secured, and the player's expectation for the result of the running gasse precursor can be secured.

  In addition, if it is a predetermined timing to drop somewhere in running under the gasse precursor to a low probability state (hell state), at least for the precursor effect under execution by the winning combination in the internal lottery after dropping to the low probability state Since it is possible to suppress the player's expectation from changing, it is possible to contribute to guaranteeing the presentation execution which places importance on the result of the internal lottery in each game. Here, as the effect pattern of the apogee, in the instruction function generation process of the second example (see [11-3-3-3]), in addition to the "continuous effect (or adjective effect)", "scramble effect" or " For example, if it is possible to intervene “normal presentation”, but the above three types of presentation are performed on the arsenal, for example, the player may indicate that the “normal presentation” is produced. It may not be possible to detect that it is a game, but even if it is before “continuous effect (or admonition effect)” appears, it is inferred that it is a precursor game when “scramble effect” appears. It can. However, if the player can guess that it is a precursor game and then drop it to a low probability state, there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation may decline if, for example, the player wins the rare role. In order to set a predetermined timing to drop somewhere in the low-probability state, it is preferable to set a timing at which at least a "scramble effect" appears.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, in the slot machine 1, the gaming state is more than usual in order to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect (prediction effect) to be executed. There is a period of forced drop to the low probability state (Hell state). As described above, when forcibly dropping to a low probability state, since the payout rate generally decreases, the slot machine 1 is in a high probability state (for example, a high probability state or a super high state) in such a manner as to offset the decrease. It is possible to increase the period / probability of the “certain state”, to improve the first hit probability when the rare character is drawn, and to improve the probability of winning the rare character in the first place. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, a game machine which handles the result of the internal lottery carefully is provided, and the situation advantageous to the player is raised and strengthened. Can. In addition, since the payout rate can be sharpened, game characteristics can be enhanced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the command function generation process of the second example is performed, the appearance ratio of expected effects is variably set so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effects (prediction effects) to be executed. The processing to be performed is not limited to forcibly dropping to a low probability state (hell state) where the degree of expectation is lower than normal with respect to a predetermined game period as described above, but the predetermined state Other methods may be used to make it difficult to win the advantageous gaming state (AT) for the gaming period. Specifically, for example, in the predetermined gaming period, the winning probability may be changed (the gaming state itself is changed) by changing the lottery table used for the lottery, which is performed in the predetermined gaming period. The number of times the internal lottery is performed may be suppressed by making it appear that a plurality of games are being played by the simulated game. Furthermore, another process may be used in which it is difficult to establish a rare combination that is likely to lead to winning of the expected effect. Even in the case where such processing is performed, the appearance ratio of expected effects can be made variable so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effects in the game after the execution of the expected effects is determined, The slot machine 1 in the case where the command function generation process of the second example is performed can exhibit the same effect as the case of controlling to the hell state for a predetermined game period.

[11-3-3-5. Effects of Instruction Function Generation Processing in Third Example]
According to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the third example, "the advantageous game advantageous to the player under the lottery state among any of the plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees" In the gaming machine, the transition to the advantageous gaming state in which the game is executed is randomly drawn, and the expected effect indicating the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous game state is executed based on the result of the lottery over a plurality of games. If an advantageous winning combination (for example, a rare combination) which is easier to win than other winning combinations during the transition to the advantageous gaming state is selected as a winning combination, it is possible to teach the result by the expected effect. It is possible to realize “a game machine capable of performing another expectation effect based on the selection of the advantageous winning combination.

  The above "advantage game state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the command function generation process of the third example, and similarly, the "expected effect" corresponds to the "prediction effect", the "continuous effect" or the "prediction game" . In the command function generation process of the third example, when the expected effect (for example, the prognostic game A) is executed based on the internal lottery result (lottery result of the winning combination), the high expected role is won during the execution of the expected effect. When the execution of another expected effect (for example, the precursor game C) is selected by being selected as a role, the precursor game A is continued to be executed, and the precursor game C is executed after the precursor game A is finished. Then, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is expected expectation presentation (predictive game C) by selecting the high expectation role while teaching the result by the expectation presentation (predictive game A). ) Can be implemented separately to realize control that respects both the former expectation production and the other expectation production, and maintain a sense of expectation for the internal lottery result that became the execution trigger for each expectation production. It can produce an effect.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when continuous effects are executed over a plurality of games, an internal lottery of a winning combination is performed while continuous effects are being performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (For example, when a high expectation winning combination such as a rare combination is selected), another continuous rendition is newly generated to cancel the current continuous rendition, or to continue the current continuous rendition The other continuous effects were canceled and other processing was performed. In the gaming machine in which such processing is performed, the result of each continuous effect is not sufficiently taught because a portion of the continuous effects that were originally generated can not be revealed, and the player's interest is reduced. There was a risk of In addition, there is also a problem that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the execution of the continuous effect is overwhelmed by the fact that a part of the continuous effect that can be generated is not revealed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is based on the internal lottery result performed during the “earning expectation effect” and the “early expectation effect” which are already being executed. With regard to the “following expectation effect” determined as above, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest by executing both expectation effects and teaching the player the result of each expected effect, The effect of respecting not only the expected effects but also the results of the internal lottery is exhibited.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, as described above, even if the slot machine 1 wins another precursor game during the precursor game (Gasse precursor), the control that respects both precursor games In order to realize such control, it is not necessary to forcibly change the lottery state (AT lottery game state) relating to the special gaming state during the execution of the precursor game. That is, by enabling the precursor game to be executed in the same lottery state as the normal time before the start of the precursor game, the player feels anticipation for AT winning and precursor effect (continuous effect) which the player feels when winning the high expectation role. Can be maintained. Then, by not forcibly changing the lottery state regarding the special gaming state during the precursor game as described above, the special gaming state is extremely improved compared to the case where the instruction function generation processing of the first example or the second example is performed. It is possible to reduce the period when it is difficult to win.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, after the “posterior proposition” is executed after the “posterior proposition” ends, the process of the first example and the second example is performed. As in the case where the instruction function generation processing is performed, the transition to the special mode in which the expectation to the special gaming state is higher than before is immediately made to transition, so that the entertaining deterioration of the player is suppressed and the player's expectation The feeling can be maintained or improved over a relatively long time. That is, even if a false alarm occurs continuously and the result of losing the AT transition is taught, the player moves to the special mode with a higher degree of superiority until at least the special mode ends. You can continue to expect. In addition, when the player is elected in the special mode, the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced by starting the precursor game again.

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is set when the high expectation player is elected with high frequency during the precursor game (Gasse precursor) as shown in the derived example. Can reduce the number of According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest by avoiding the continuation of redundant false leading signs while enabling control in which a plurality of expected effects (predictive effects) are respected. .

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is forcedly forced when it is won a predetermined number of times in the high-ranking player during the prognostic game (Gasse prognostic) as shown in the derived example. You can set the gasse aura. According to such a slot machine 1, since it is possible to increase the ratio of starting the precursor game for the high-ranking high-ranking player who originally had high expectation, an effect valuing the internal lottery result of being high-ranking high-ranking player winning It can be provided to the player.

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, as shown in the derived example, when the high expectation role is won a plurality of times during the precursor game (particularly, during the adversity) It is also possible to limit the number of upper limit times of the set precursor games (pre-maze). According to such a slot machine 1, when the winning of the high expectation role is won a plurality of times in a short period during the precursor game, etc., the precursor game is repeatedly set again, and the precursor game is continued for an excessive period of time. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued, it can be expected to increase the player's interest over a reasonably long period of time.

[11-3-4. Instruction function display process]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the main board 409 is to generate the instruction function as a result of the instruction function generation process (specifically, for example, when the order of winning the small winning combination in the AT game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). Hereinafter, the indication function indication displayed using the special indication LED 612 will be described in detail.

[11-3-4-1. Display of indication function (first example)]
First, a first example of indication function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the first example, as shown in FIG. 47, the slot machine 1 includes two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side, and using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b The indication function is displayed by displaying the characters and numbers of digits.

  FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the indication function display of the first example. FIG. 80 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 81 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED are shown in the "segment display" column, and the content indicated by the displayed alphanumeric characters is shown in the "content" column. Furthermore, in FIG. 81, the display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 etc. is shown in the “Navi display” column when the corresponding indication function display is performed, and the “use application” column The scenes and situations in which the display is used are shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub substrate 510 will also be described in [11-3-5] later.

In the indication function display of the first example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules relating to indication function display.
(1) The indication function display is performed using two 7-segment LEDs (7 segments) (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating an indication of the pressing location, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.
(2) In a period in which the indication function display is performed, the indication function indication is started at least before acceptance of pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 being rotated The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the indication function display to the number-of-payouts display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 on which the reel stop operation corresponding to is performed. That is, the period of the indication function display and the period of the payout number display do not overlap. In the case where the game value (medal) is not paid out as a result of the game, that is, when the number of paid out is “0”, the number of paid out need not be displayed. As a supplementary requirement, when the indication function indication is performed and the number-of-payouts indication is not performed, the indication function indication is canceled (not displayed) at the same timing as the case where the number-of-payments indication is performed. Alternatively, the indication function may continue to be displayed until the payout process is completed.
(3) In the game in which the indication function indication is performed by the special display LED 612, when one of the spinning reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel indicates the indication function ( The special display LED 612b) does not indicate the reel to be stopped first (that is, the reel different from the instruction content is stopped for the first time), or the pressing timing of the reel stop button 211 indicates the indication function display (If the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the special display LED 612a) as the indication of the pressing location (that is, if the stop operation of the reel is performed at a position different from the instructed content), all The display mode in the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is finished.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the indication function is to be generated, what kind of indication content is to be displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the indication function display is the main board 409 in the game. Determined based on the winning combination. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (details will be described later).

  The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the “indication of the pressing place” displayed on the special display LED 612 a within the range in which the “appropriate pressing place” based on the winning combination of the game is not denied. be able to. Specifically, for example, when “BB1 (red 7 symbols aligned)” is selected as the winning combination, the main substrate 409 determines instruction content to display “2” (red 7 symbols) on the special display LED 612 a. Other than that, the instruction content may be determined to display “0” (no designation), since the game method aiming at “red 7 symbol” is not denied.

  In addition, the main board 409 is the “appropriate push order” based on the winning combination of the game for the “push order” instruction contents displayed on the special display LED 612b, similarly to the instruction contents of the “probable place of push place”. In the range which does not deny, the instruction content can be decided arbitrarily. For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which a push order bell (AT1, AT2) that sets the forward press to “proper push order” is selected as the winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of “pushing order” to “left, middle, right” (6 pushing order), according to the display example of FIG. 81 (details will be described later) , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, as the instruction content for clarifying only the "left" of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, "left first (2 choice)" may be used as the instruction contents, and in this case, According to the display example 81 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612 b. In addition, from the condition that the "appropriate push order" is not denied, the instruction contents of the push order may include at least the game procedure in the "appropriate push order". That is, "left first or right first" (segment display "E" in FIG. 81) or "left first or middle first" (see FIG. 81) as the instruction content having the possibility that the left reel 301a may be stopped first. The segment display "F" of 81 may be used as the instruction content, and further, the instruction content for determining the pressing order as unknown (segment display "0" in FIG. 81) may be used.

  Next, display examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 80, four indications of “0 (not specified)”, “1 (chance pattern)”, “2 (red 7 pattern)”, and “3 (BAR pattern)” as a standard of the pressing place Numbers are set to display. In addition, when "0" is displayed as a standard of a pushing place, it does not designate a standard of pushing order, that is, it means that an operation by a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case Even when the reel stop button 211 is pressed (unspecific stop operation) without being aware of the stop timing, the symbol combination based on any winning combination is not necessarily aligned on the effective line. That is, when it is intended to reliably stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in the game in which "no designation" is selected, a predetermined stopping timing which can prevent the winning combination from being missed like the maximum efficiency batting method described above. Is required to perform a stop operation. Specifically, for example, when the winning order bell (AT1 to AT10) is won during the AT, etc., "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the pressing order bell is a stop operation by the proper pressing order. As long as it is, it is possible to arrange the combination of symbols in the role of the bell regardless of the stop timing. On the other hand, for example, when the special display LED 612 a displays “0” when the winning combination is a combination (for example, a watermelon combination) that may be missed depending on the stop timing, the stop timing is not considered. If the user presses the reel stop button 211, the watermelon combination may be missed, and in order to reliably win the watermelon combination, when the symbols that make up the combination of watermelon combinations are in a drawable range It is necessary to perform the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

  Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as an indication of the pressing place is a symbol relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating, but the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol taken as an indication at appropriate timing. Even if it is made to do, it is not necessary to make the said pattern always stop on an effective line.

  Moreover, about the symbol corresponding to "1"-"3" shown in FIG. 80, you may change the corresponding symbol arbitrarily. For example, the "chance symbol" targeted by "1" may be applied as a "positive" symbol or a "right" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Also, the target symbol of "2" may be a "blue 7" symbol instead of a red 7 symbol. The segment display shown in FIG. 80 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be set by increasing or decreasing the displayable range by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added to a symbol (for example, a watermelon symbol) other than those illustrated in FIG. Moreover, the symbol set as a standard of the pressing place is not limited to one. For example, a segment display such as “one of red 7 design or blue 7 design” is set as a standard of the pressing place May be Moreover, although it is common to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the correspondence between "content" and "segment display" does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of "segment display" indicating the same "content" is prepared May be

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as display contents of segment display. . The contents of each display pattern will be described in detail below. Note that when displaying on 7 segments, capital letters "B" and "D" may not be distinguishable from the numbers "8" and "0", respectively, so "b" and "d" in FIG. 81. It is supposed to be displayed in lower case.

  The display “0” in the special display LED 612 b is used when the push order is not limited (push order unquestioned). However, as described in the “use application” column, it is not only used when the winning combination of the pressing order is unquestioned, and when it is the winning combination that can be won by the alternative, it teaches the pressing order. It can also be used if not. In addition to push order bells and replays, the winning order with no push order includes not only winning chances such as chance eyes, watermelons, cherry, etc. Therefore, when the indication function display is performed when the rare character is won, the display on the special display LED 612b is "0", but at this time, expected display such as "chance!" It may be performed. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or instruct the player that the game has a high expectation different from a normal one. Also, in the latter case that the player does not teach the pushing order when the winning combination which can be won by the alternative, the navigation display example becomes "? · · ·?" Because the proper pushing order is not taught. .

  The display "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b is used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as the proper push order, and displays so-called push order of 6 options. Can. When the selection order of six options is displayed in the indication function display, at least the first reel to be stopped and the second reel to be stopped are taught in the navigation display. Third, the reels to be stopped are clearly shown in the elimination law but may be clearly indicated.

  In addition, the display "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b is used when it is determined that one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first as the proper pushing order. Thus, it is possible to display so-called three-choice push order. When the pressing order of 3 options is displayed on the indication function display, the navigation display first teaches a reel to be stopped.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five selection push order bells are prepared as described with reference to FIG. 48, FIG. 49, etc., but in such a case, three selection push order display Since there are not enough display patterns, it is sufficient to use the 6-order push order display or use only a part of the 3 order push order display (only in the case of the middle push order bell).

  When a pressing order such as “1” to “9” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, the most payout is given when the stop operation according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b is performed. An advantageous game result is provided to the player, such as a push order bell winning in a stop form in which the number is reached. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination in which a drop can occur.

  In addition, “providing a player with advantageous game results” described in the preceding paragraph includes “preventing provision of adverse game results to the player”. Below, a specific example is given and demonstrated. For example, a push order replay in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order is prepared, and when the push order replay is won, the blue 7 pattern alignment stops when the stop operation is performed in "specific push order". It can be done. If this blue 7 symbol assortment is internally decided that the AT game number is to be internally added, for example, when winning in the push order replay during the AT, it will be used as one of the effects to teach the above addition. Do. When the AT game number is added at the time of winning such push order replay, displaying the "specific push order" as the indication function leads to provision of "a game result advantageous to the player". On the other hand, when the "specific push order" is displayed when the AT game number is not added while winning the push order replay, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. Also, since "a game result advantageous to a player" in which the number of AT games is added is not provided, a "convenient game result to a player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such a “convenient game result to the player”, when the number of AT games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned order replay replay, “specific press” An indication function can be displayed to avoid the order. By playing a game along such an indication function display, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the blue 7 symbol assortment in which the number of AT games is not added, so that "the disadvantaged game result is provided to the player. As a result, "a player is provided with advantageous game results".

  On the other hand, the displays "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b are different from the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, and "one part" of the pushing order which can lead to the game result advantageous to the player. It is used when displaying. For example, in the case of the display "A", this only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player has to select (select 2) a reel to be stopped second. Also, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is only indicated that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and it is not shown which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if the proper pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, any of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) being rotated again in the second stop. You can make it 4 choices as a result by making it choose whether it stops. In addition, if it is assumed that the appropriate pushing order is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, two choices can be made.

  As described above, when the pressing order such as "A" to "F" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation according to the display content is performed, the pressing order is not necessarily appropriate. However, when it is finally possible to select the proper pushing order, the player is provided with advantageous game results such as the pushing order bell being won in a stop form in which the largest number of payouts are made.

  As described above, the display examples of the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described, but in practice, the two-digit value combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612, thereby indicating the instruction content in the game. FIG. 89 described later shows a specific display example.

  And, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the indication function display of the first example, the indication function indication is performed in a display mode that makes it easy to grasp the contents of the indication. An appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and it is possible to expect more advantageous game results than when no indication function display is performed. Further, by making it easy to attract the attention of the player to the display on which such an instruction function display is performed, it is possible to create a game characteristic which has not been found in the conventional gaming machine.

  Moreover, the display examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 do not necessarily require all the symbols used as a guide of the pressing position and the pressing order, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected to reduce the volume of data required for the main substrate 409 to perform indication function display.

11-3-4-2. Indication function display (second example)]
Next, a second example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the indication function display of the second example, the slot machine 1 is assumed to be equipped with one dotted 7-segment LED (special indication LED 612c shown in FIG. 85), and the indication function is performed by displaying a predetermined pattern with this special indication LED 612c. Display.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram for describing a display used in the indication function display of the second example. In the indication function display of the second example, a 7-segment LED with dots (special indication LED 612c) is used as a display for indicating the indication function. As shown in FIG. 82, the special display LED 612c is a so-called 7-segment LED with a dot LED added, and is a segment LED having a total of eight lightable sites. One example of the lighting rule of the special display LED 612c is shown in FIG. 82, and eight lightable parts are each digit bits of data represented by an 8-bit binary number (1 bit, 2 bits,.・ ・ ・, Corresponding to 8 bit). Therefore, it is possible to realize the indication function display corresponding to the target data by the special display LED 612 c by expressing the target data (data for indicating the indication function) indicating the contents of the indication in 8-bit binary numbers. Specifically, for example, when the second bit of the target data is set (the value of the second lowest digit is “1”), the littable portion indicated by “2 bit” in FIG. 82 is lit. Be done. Note that such a display rule is only an example, and for example, a predetermined process may be performed and the light may be turned on so that the value of the target data can not be easily read.

FIGS. 83 and 84 are diagrams (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the indication function display of the second example. In the indication function display of the second example, it is assumed that the following rule is provided as an example of a rule regarding indication function indication.
(1) Use one dot-equipped 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c) to perform indication function display. Lighting control of the special display LED 612 c is performed corresponding to each digit bit of “instruction function display data” represented by an 8-bit binary number. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, in the upper 4 bits (5 bits to 8 bits) of the "instruction function display data", information indicating an indication of the pressed position is held (FIG. 83), and Information indicating the pressing order is held in 4 bits (1 bit to 4 bits) (FIG. 84).
(2) Same as the rule (2) on the instruction function described in the first example.
(3) Same as rule (3) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the indication function is to be generated, what kind of indication content is displayed on the special display LED 612c as the indication function display is the main as in the first example. The substrate 409 is determined based on the winning combination in the game. Moreover, since the specific instruction content illustrated in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84 corresponds to the instruction content illustrated in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the description will not be repeated.

  First, the "segment display" shown in FIG. 83 will be described. FIG. 83 exemplifies a specific example of high-order 4 bits indicating a standard of the pressing place in the indication function display data. Specifically, "1" is set to the 5th bit when the indication of the pressing place is "not specified", and "1" is the 6th bit when the indication of the pressing place is "chance pattern". If the standard of pressed place is “Red 7 pattern”, “1” is set at the 7th bit. If the standard of pressed place is “BAR pattern”, “1” is set at the 8th bit. Be Then, according to the lighting rule shown in FIG. 82, “segment display” corresponding to each “content” is performed in the special display LED 612 c.

  Next, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 84 will be described. FIG. 84 exemplifies a specific example of lower 4 bits indicating the pressing order in the indication function display data. Specifically, different instruction contents are set to each of the 16 lower 4 bits "0000" to "1111". Then, “segment display” corresponding to each digit bit is performed in the special display LED 612c.

  Since the high-order 4 bits shown in "binary number display" in FIG. 83 and the low-order 4 bits shown in "binary number display" in FIG. 84 are displayed with different digits, the indication function indication actually used Data can be represented by binary 8-bit data combining upper 4 bits (FIG. 83) indicating a standard of pressing position and lower 4 bits (FIG. 84) indicating pressing order, and an instruction on the special display LED 612c Also for the function indication, each of the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits can be displayed simultaneously.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing a specific display example of the indication function display of the second example. In FIG. 85, a display example of the indication function indication displayed on the special display LED 612c based on the illustration of FIGS. 83 and 84, and a navigation indication table displayed on the image display 500 etc. corresponding to the indication function indication. An illustrative example is shown. The details of the navi display will be described in detail in the following [11-3-5], as the specific example of the indication function display of the first example, since the same instruction content as FIG. 85 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The description is omitted here.

  First, according to FIG. In 1 is shown a display example when the indication content is "Pressing No" (No. 0 in Fig. 83) and the pushing order is "No question" (No. 0 in Fig. 84). There is. At this time, on the special display LED 612c, lighting display corresponding to the data for indicating function for binary function of 8 bits "00010000" which is a combination of the upper 4 bits "0001" and the lower 4 bits "0000" is performed. More specifically, only the littable portion corresponding to 5 bits is lit.

  Next, in FIG. In example 2, when the indication content is "Indicated without designation" (No. 0 in Fig. 83) and the indication order is "left, right, middle" (No. 2 in Fig. 84). It is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the data for indicating function of binary number 8 bits "00010010" which is a combination of the upper 4 bits "0001" and the lower 4 bits "0010". More specifically, the littable portions corresponding to 2 bits and 5 bits are lit.

  Next, in FIG. When the instruction content is 3 and the standard for the pressed place is “Red 7 pattern” (No. 2 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “right first (2 choice)” (No. 12 in FIG. 84) A display example of is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the data for indicating function of binary number 8 bits “01001100” which is a combination of the upper 4 bits “0100” and the lower 4 bits “1100”. More specifically, the littable portions corresponding to 3 bits, 4 bits and 7 bits are lit.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the indication function display of the second example as described above, the indication function indication is performed in a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the contents of the indication at first glance. Even if the player notices that the indication function display is being performed by the display LED 612c, a new game characteristic is created in which the instruction contents can not be grasped immediately. For example, it can be expected from the effect that arouses the curiosity of wanting to know the display law of the indication function display in the special display LED 612c. Also, even if it is very difficult to grasp the instruction content from the display mode in the special display LED 612c, the player is taught the correct reel stop operation by performing the navigation display based on the instruction content. Therefore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can enhance the fun of the player when the indication function display is performed without causing a disadvantage for the player.

  Also, in the case of the indication function display as in the second example, since the indication function indication data in binary notation is generally used in calculation processing, the main board 409 determines the indication contents of the indication function, and the special While reducing the processing load when displaying the indication function on the display LED 612, it is possible to easily realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the contents of the indication. More specifically, assuming that the condition device number registered in the program (number assigned to the group if it is grouped) is represented by an 8-bit binary number, such condition device number is directly indicated as the indication function By enabling output as instruction data by using the indication function display, unnecessary conversion processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on the main substrate 409 can be reduced. Further, in such a case, it is possible to realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content without changing the above-mentioned conditional device number to another number or the like.

  As described above, as shown in the first example and the second example, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can implement various display methods to realize indication function display under the control of the main board 409.

11-3-4-3. Change of display mode]
Next, the change of the display mode in the display (special display LED 612) on which the indication function display is performed will be described.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, the instruction content based on the winning combination can be displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display. Here, since the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display is a game method (that is, a proper reel stop operation) that can bring an advantageous result for the player, the game timing at which the player can execute the reel stop operation The indication function display needs to be displayed by the time. In other words, when the indication function display is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "a proper reel stop operation" to be executed next at a specific timing before the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable. The special indication LED 612 must display the indication function on the special indication LED 612 (for example, for which reel stop button 211 a to 211 c, which pressing position should be operated to stop as a guide). In the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612, “specific timing” described later indicates such a meaning.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the principle relating to the display timing of such indication function display is applied to the special display LED 612, as described in [9-3] and the like, the special display LED 612 is instructed It is also possible to display information other than the function display (for example, a payout display, an error display, other effect display, etc.).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the indication function display is performed in the special display LED 612, the display mode at the above “specific timing” in the special display LED 612 should be executed next “proper reel stop operation The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed to another display mode at timings other than the above “specific timing”, as long as the instruction function display of the correct instruction content with regard to “1. Below, the change of the display mode in special display LED612 is demonstrated in detail.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 as described in detail below, the display mode changes before and after the change so that the player can easily notice the change. In addition to this, components other than the special display LED 612 may be used to suggest or teach the change, thereby making it easier for the player to notice. Specifically, for example, a predetermined indicator (LED, lamp, etc.) is lit or blinked, a specific sound is output from a speaker, or “look at special display LED 612” on the liquid crystal display surface of the image display body 500! The presentation screen such as may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying a predetermined effect screen on the image display body 500, if the progress of the effect screen which has been displayed so far is temporarily stopped, etc., the player is more surely aware of the display change? You can

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the display mode in the special display LED 612 is easily changed by the player in this manner, it is ensured by the player that the display mode is changed (or changed). Since the player can be made aware of it, the player is given the impression that a special effect different from usual is performed, and the player's expectation is enhanced with respect to the provision of special benefits and the like. In addition, it is possible to make the player expect that the instruction content of the instruction function display displayed after the change becomes instruction content that can lead to more advantageous game results.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode may be changed easily so as to make the player notice as described above, and conversely, the display mode is changed in such a manner as not easily noticed by the player. May be Specifically, it is possible to change the display itself in the special display LED 612 in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to notice, without performing the effect for making the player notice easily as described above. More specifically, for example, the special display LED 612 changes the display of “8” to “0” to relatively reduce the difference between the lighting locations before and after the change, or light the dot segment whose lighting region is narrow (flickers) Alternatively, there is a change such as turning off the light, or changing the brightness of the segment (including the change of the brightness degree by gradation control in addition to the simple ON / OFF switching).

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize an effect as if the display mode has been changed before the player notices, when changing the display mode that the player is unlikely to notice. A great surprise can be given to the player who notices the display change at any timing, and the game interest can be enhanced. Further, since it is possible to make the player conscious of when the display mode is changed, it is possible to enhance concentration on the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the display mode is changed such that the player is less likely to notice the state in which all the reels 301 are not stopped (the state in which all the reels 301 are rotating). Also, it is desirable not to change the instruction content on the first stop reel (the indication of the pressing order and the pressing place of the reel 301 to be first stopped). In addition, when changing such a display mode in special display LED612, it is desirable not to change the instruction content regarding the 1st stop reel also about the instruction content by the navigation display in image display body 500 grade | etc.,.

  More specifically, first, the reason why it is preferable not to change the instruction content of the pushing order is that the player who is not aware of the instruction content after the change when the instruction content on the first stop reel is changed due to the change of the display mode. This is because the game proceeds according to the instruction content before the change (the game operation is performed in the order of pushing against the latest instruction content), which may be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by not changing the contents of the instruction regarding the first stop reel, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player and to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  In addition, as a reason why it is better not to change the indication contents of the indication of the pressing place, for example, the indication contents A as if the condition device corresponding to red 7 pattern alignment is operating (for example, pushing order is reverse pushing, pushing The indicator for the location is 7 symbols red, and when the display mode is changed after the display mode is displayed indicating that the 7 symbols are aligned when all the reels stop, the reel stop button to make the first stop when changing the display mode 211 (in this case, instruction content B indicating that another condition device which is not aligned even if aiming at the red 7 pattern is activated (for example, instruction content) before the reel stop button 211 c is pressed according to the reverse push The display mode of the same stop operation as A (in which the order of pressing is reverse pressing, and the indication of pressing place is red 7 symbols) but indicating that red 7 symbols can not be aligned when the third stop reel is stopped) When thus changed, because it is not aligned even aimed Red 7 symbols would be known in advance to the player, there is a possibility that the game excitement is reduced. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode after the change from the instruction content A is the instruction content C which does not deviate from the instruction content A (at least, the pressing order is right reel first stop and red 7 The symbol is included, and the display mode of the instruction content not denying the possibility of aligning the red 7 symbol at the time of all the reel stops) is indicated before the change until the player at least makes the first reel 301c first stop. It is preferable to be able to expect for the game result (7 patterns of red matches) in line with the indicated instruction content A.

  In addition, as a specific example of the display mode based on the instruction | indication content C, a thing like "the pushing order is reverse pushing and the standard of the pushing place is red 7 design or BAR design" is mentioned. In the case of such instruction content C, there is no stop position at which both the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol can be drawn in the reel band 321c (the right reel 301c) (see the symbol array in FIG. 46). When making the first stop, the player can select (select) which one of the red 7 symbol or the BAR symbol to press and aim as a target of the place. Then, when the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating internally, the player performs the reel stop operation at a timing that allows the player to push in the proper push order and pull in the red 7 symbol. 7 All the designs stop. In addition, if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 pattern alignment is not operating internally or the stop operation is not performed with the proper push order or timing, the red 7 pattern alignment does not stop. Note that the instruction to cause the player to select the pressing position can also be performed by the second stop and the third stop of the reel.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the instruction content (the indication of the pressed place) related to the first stop reel is not limited to the above example (change from instruction content A to instruction content C). As another example, the instruction content C may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the display mode of the instruction content C is indicated by the special display LED 612, only the indeterminate information that the red 7 symbol alignment may stop by reverse pressing is provided, but then the first Before the operation on the stop reel is performed (the freeze process may be performed in parallel), the display mode based on the instruction content A is changed, and the confirmation information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push Can be provided, and the player can be expected to give a red seven-sorted bonus before stopping the reel 301.

  Further, as a further example, the instruction content B may be changed to the instruction content A with respect to the change of the instruction content (the standard of the pressing place) regarding the first stop reel. In such a case, while the display mode of the instruction content B is indicated by the special display LED 612, even if aiming at the red 7 pattern by reverse pressing, the irregular determination information that the red 7 pattern alignment does not stop is provided. By changing to the display mode based on the instruction content A before the operation on the first stop reel is performed, the determination information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push is provided. Here, when changing the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A is performed in a mode in which the player is easily noticed by performing freeze control or the like, the player's interest is changed before stopping the reel 301. It can be enhanced. On the other hand, when changing the display mode in such a manner that the player hardly notices the change of the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A, the player does not notice the confirmation information of the instruction content A Although it is assumed that the stop operation is performed, even in such a case, after the stop of all the reels 301, the red 7 symbols are aligned contrary to the recognition of the player who thought that the red 7 symbols were not aligned. Can give the player surprise and pleasure, and can be expected to improve interest.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of intentionally changing the instruction content regarding the first stop reel along with the change of the display mode, the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is received by sandwiching the freeze control etc. It is desirable to prevent the player from performing a wrong game operation that does not conform to the changed instruction content by delaying the start time of the stop button pressing acceptance start to start the.

  In addition, as an example of such a change of the display mode, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player notices when a game is performed according to a game procedure (for example, pushing order error) which was not originally intended. The display mode can be changed (including deletion) in a difficult manner (details will be described later in [11-3-4-3-1]). According to such a slot machine 1, since it is possible to prevent the player from being confused in the subsequent game procedure, it is possible to continue the game with peace of mind.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when being controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT state, an appropriate stop operation is taught by the image display body 500 or the like, but only monotonous to repeat the game according to the teaching There was a problem that it tended to become work. On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment causes the special display LED 612 managed by the main substrate 409 to perform an indication function indication to instruct a stop operation, and makes the player notice the display mode in the special display LED 612. Since the change can be made in an easy mode or a mode that makes it difficult for the player to notice, it is possible to add variety to the game effects of the slot machine 1 unlike the conventional game machine.

[11-3-4-3-1. Display change timing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the indication function display is performed, any timing satisfying the condition that the pressing operation is not accepted as a valid operation even if the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed by the player ( The main board 409 can change the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the timing when the reel stop operation can not be received. Below, the typical change timing of such a display change is mentioned, and the specific example of a process accompanying a display change is demonstrated.

(1) Start lever pressed to stop button pressed reception First, as a typical first change timing, from when the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game (start lever pressed), the reel stop button 211 a ̃ A period until when the acceptance of the pressing operation on 211 c is started (stop button pressing acceptance start) can be mentioned. Strictly speaking, instead of changing the display mode immediately before the start of pressing the stop button pressing, the player can notice the change in the display mode before starting the stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing at which a predetermined time is secured before the start of pressing the stop button.

  In the slot machine 1, when the operation of the start lever 210 is performed, an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed by the main substrate 409, and the instruction content of the instruction function display is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery. Then, when changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the first change timing described above, for example, the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 at the timing after pressing the start lever, and then the reel is stopped. Before the pressing operation on the button 211 can be received, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed to the second display mode.

  At this time, it is more preferable to add freeze control at the time of rotation control of the reel 301 and change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to the second display mode while the freeze control is being performed. As described above, by changing the display mode while the freeze control is being performed, the display mode can be reliably changed in a period in which the reception of the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 is not started, and the player can The effect of making it easy to notice that the effect (here, the change of the display mode) is performed can also be realized.

  In such a case, the second display mode is required to be the display mode of the indication function display indicating the correct instruction content regarding the reel 301 to be stopped first, while the first display mode is correct. It may be a display mode of the indication function display that is not the instruction content, and may be a display mode other than the indication function display. A specific display mode example will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2]. Furthermore, another display mode may be displayed between the first display mode and the second display mode.

  In this manner, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at least once by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the first change timing, so special effects are performed. Can make the player feel the same, and can enhance the fun of the game. In particular, when the display mode is changed during the execution of the freeze control, the special feeling can be further enhanced by sandwiching the freeze control which is obviously different from the normal reel control. In addition, if such freeze control is performed when a lottery result with a high degree of rarity is obtained, the degree of expectation of the player can be remarkably increased.

  In addition, in the case of changing the display mode at the timing immediately before the start of the first stop button pressing acceptance start among the first change timing, as described in [11-3-4-3], the first stop reel It is desirable not to change the instruction content relating to (the order of pressing the reel 301 to be stopped and the indication of the place to be pressed first).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first change timing, the display mode is changed at an arbitrary timing within a period from immediately after the start lever is pressed to immediately before the stop button press acceptance start. be able to. In particular, when the player changes the display mode at “the timing immediately before the start of pressing the first stop button start” which makes it difficult to change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, the instruction content on the first stop reel is maintained By changing the display mode, the disadvantage of the player can be avoided. In addition, when the player changes the display mode at “the timing when the fixed time is secured before the start of the stop button start acceptance (including freeze control)”, the player can change the operation mode of the first stop button press. The change can increase the player's sense of expectation.

(2) First stop button pressing to second stop button pressing acceptance start (or second stop button pressing to third stop button pressing acceptance start)
Next, as a representative second change timing, a reel corresponding to the remaining rotating reels 301 when any of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed (for example, the first stop button is pressed). A period until the time when the acceptance of the pressing operation of the stop button 211 is started (for example, the start of accepting the pressing of the second stop button) can be mentioned. Also in the case of the second change timing, as in the case of the first change timing, if possible, a fixed time is secured before the end of the period (for example, the start of pressing the second stop button) It is preferable to change the display mode at the timing.

  When changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the second change timing, for example, after the game is started and the reel 301 starts to rotate, the first stop button is pressed (one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed first) The first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 until it is operated, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is displayed until the depression acceptance of the remaining stop button is started after the first stop button is pressed. Change to the second display mode.

  As a specific situation in which the display mode is changed at the second change timing, a display change originally intended and a display change not originally intended are assumed. Here, since the first display mode described above is displayed immediately before the first stop button is pressed, it is necessary to display an indication function indicating "correct instruction content" at least with respect to the first stop button. . On the other hand, in the second display mode described above, different types of display modes can be adopted depending on whether the originally intended display change or the originally unintended display change, as described in detail below. .

  First, with the display change originally intended, the main board 409 previously changes that the display mode in the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode as the game progresses. This means at least a display change when it is determined that the first stop button is pressed.

  In the case of such originally intended display change, the freeze control is executed after the first stop button is pressed, and a period in which the pressing operation of the second stop button (the remaining reel stop buttons 211) can not be received. Preferably, the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode during the freeze control. At this time, in the second display mode, an indication function display indicating “correct instruction contents” related to the second stop button is displayed.

  In addition, at the time of the display change originally intended, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode does not have to be the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display manner, and for example, the instruction indicated by the first display manner The content may be "group display" related to the first stop button, and the instruction content shown in the second display mode may be "segment display" which can specify the pushing order of all the reels. The "group display" will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  In addition, when the instruction content indicated by the first display mode and the instruction content indicated by the second display mode are made identical at the time of the display change originally intended, different display modes indicating the same instruction contents are selected. It is sufficient to change the display. Different display modes indicating the same instruction content will also be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  Next, with the display change that was not originally intended, the main board 409 is performed in advance (at least the first stop button is pressed, for example, when it is performed in a game procedure in which the progress of the game is not assumed). It means that the display change which has not been decided is made. Specifically, when the reel stop button 211 corresponding to a reel different from the instruction content indicated in the instruction function display (in this case, the first display mode) is pressed when the first stop button is pressed, A so-called push order error can be considered.

  When a pressing order error occurs, for example, if a pressing order error occurs when the first stop button is pressed, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is continued for the remaining second stop button press and the third stop button pressed. Even if displayed, there is a possibility that the game operation according to the instruction content can not be performed. Specifically, for example, although the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop despite the instruction order of “right, left, middle” being indicated as the instruction content, the instruction content is continued as it is As a result, the second target reel to be stopped is the left reel 301a that has already been stopped, which may confuse the player as to what kind of game should be played. In such a case, the main board 409 of the slot machine 1 can be roughly divided into the following three types of control.

  The first control is control to continue the indication function of the present location even if a push order error occurs. In this case, the display change from the first display mode to the second display mode may not be performed. However, prepare a second display mode with a special display mode that teaches that the pushing order is wrong, and change the display to such a second display mode when a pushing order error occurs. May be At this time, it is preferable to notify the player that the pressing order error has occurred even with the image display body 500 or the like. When performing such control, even if the instruction content of the instruction function display is not changed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the pressing order error has been made, and the instruction content of the instruction function display and the subsequent game Even if the procedure can not be coped with, it can be convinced to advance the game.

  The second control is control for deleting the indication function display that has been displayed until then, when a push order error occurs. If such control is regarded as one of the changes of the display mode, the change of the display mode eliminates the situation where the game operation along the instruction content can not be performed, and prevents the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure. can do. In addition, after the indication function display in the first display mode is erased, a display mode that notifies that the indication function display has been erased may be displayed as a second display mode in the special display LED 612. Since the player can be made to recognize the reason why the first display mode has disappeared by performing such a change in the display mode, the continuation of the game can be promoted without causing anxiety in the subsequent game. Can.

  The third control is a second display mode of the indication function display such that the instruction contents for instructing an operation procedure that is advantageous for the remaining stop operation when a pressing error occurs by pressing the first stop button. It is control to make it change.

  For example, as in the pushing order bell (AT1 to AT10) described with reference to FIG. 51, the winning combination in which the number of medals paid out at the time of winning becomes 9, 2, 2 or 1 depending on the pushing order When the indication function display is performed, if a correct stop operation is performed in accordance with the original indication content (first display mode), it is possible to win a bell and expect to pay out nine medals. However, if a push order error occurs and the reel stop button 211 different from the instruction content is firstly operated to stop, the following two reel stop buttons 211 will be processed because of the priority operation of the condition device. Even if the operation is stopped, it can not be expected to pay out nine medals. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, an operation procedure that can be expected to be paid out for two medals as a slightly advantageous operation procedure is re-displayed as the second display mode. The indication function can be displayed.

  In a specific example, when the AT 10 is won, the instruction content (“05” according to FIGS. 80 and 81) indicates that the indication of the pressing place is “no specification” and the pressing order is “right, left, middle”. It is assumed that it is displayed (first display mode). Here, assuming that the player presses the reel stop button 211b in the wrong order, the cherry symbol or the BAR symbol is stopped on the effective line of the middle reel 301b (see FIG. 51). If the remaining reel stop operation is performed, the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c will be stopped, but before the next reel stop button pressing operation can be accepted, for example, aim the BAR pattern at the right reel The display mode is changed to a specific instruction content ("34" according to FIGS. 80 and 81) (second display mode). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed along the instruction content of the second display mode, the BAR is stopped on the effective line of the right reel 301c, and the bell 1 symbol or bell is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 301a. 2 symbols stop. As a result, when the symbol combination of the accessory 2 or the accessory 8 stops on the effective line, two medals can be paid out.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when a display change that was not originally intended is performed, the display mode is changed so that the instruction content is as advantageous to the player as little as possible. It is possible to relieve a player who receives an adverse game result due to a pushing order error or the like. Further, by providing a gaming machine capable of realizing such relief control, it is possible to expect to maintain the motivation to continue the game without excessively discouraging the player who has made a pushing error.

  In the example of the push order bell described above, the maximum number of payouts (9 sheets) could not be expected at the time when the push order is wrong at the first stop button, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the first Even if the stop button misplaced the pressing order, as the pressing order of the remedial action, the remaining stop operations were performed aiming at a specific symbol and a specific pressing order in the form corresponding to each winning combination of the pressing order small part. In this case, a "relief push sequence" may be prepared, which can be expected for the largest number of payouts. Then, when a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to the second display mode in which the instruction content is such a pressing order for relief, and the player can receive the maximum number of sheets even if the pressing order is incorrect. Since it is possible to give an opportunity to obtain a medal, it is possible to suppress a drop in the game interest of the player.

  Further, when the display in the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the third control described above, the image output by the image display body 500, the audio output by the speaker, etc. Preferably, the player can reliably detect the change.

  The above is the representative change timing in which the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed when the indication function display is performed, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is limited to these change timings. If the timing at which the reel stop button 211 is not pressed is not received, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at other timings (for example, after all the reels 301 have been stopped or after the payout processing is completed). Can.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the display mode of the special display LED 612 according to the progress of the game at a predetermined change timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not received even during the game. It can be changed. In particular, even when an originally unintended game operation such as a push order error is performed, the appropriate instruction content for the next game operation can be obtained by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 based on the game operation. Can be shown. As a result, even if an inappropriate game operation is performed in an unintended manner such as a pushing order error, it is possible to provide relief for the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the line of sight of the player tends to be concentrated only on the reel and the effect display device (corresponding to the reel 301 and the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1), and the player's interest in the entire gaming machine However, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the display mode of the indicator (special display LED 612) on which the indication function display is performed is changed at the timing when the reel stop operation by the player is not received. Because of this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the display. As a result, as a target of attention by the player is expanded, it can be expected to increase the player's interest in the entire gaming machine as compared with the conventional gaming machine.

[11-3-4-3-2. Display change example]
In the following, examples of changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

(1) Display Change Between Indication Function Displays First, in the special display LED 612, an example of a display change in which the display mode is changed between the indication function displays will be shown. As described above, in the indication function indication, one or more indication features of the indication function indication may be set for one indication content, as described above. Therefore, when the indication function display is performed in the special display LED 612, another display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) indicates the same instruction content as the display mode (for example, the above-described one). It can be changed to the second display mode).

  86 and 87 are diagrams (parts 1 and 2) for explaining display examples of an indication function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. "Seg display 1" and "Seg display 2" shown in FIG. 86 are display examples of the indication function display in the special display LED 612a, and "Seg display 1" and "Seg display 2" shown in FIG. 87 are the special display LED 612b. It is an example of a display of the indication function display in. Since "segment display 1" in FIGS. 86 and 87 is the same as the display example of "segment display" in FIGS. 80 and 81, respectively, the description will be omitted.

  According to FIGS. 86 and 87, “segment display 1” and “segment display 2” are set as a plurality of display examples showing the same instruction content in the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a, 612b). Looking at individual displays, corresponding to display examples “0” to “3” of “segment display 1” in the special display LED 612 a, “4” to “7” are in order in the display example of “segment display 2” respectively In the display example of “segment display 2” corresponding to the display examples “0” to “F” of “segment display 1” in the special display LED 612b, “F” to “0” are set (FIG. 86). The order is set in the reverse order to that of the segment display 1 (FIG. 87).

  And when such "segment display 1" and "segment display 2" are compared, the display on the special display LED 612 (display combining special display LEDs 612a and 612b) shows the indication function display of the same instruction content. , Always different segment display. As a specific example, when the standard of the pressing place is "red 7 symbol" and the pressing order is "right, middle, left", the display of "segment display 1" and "segment display 2" will be described. First, in the case of "segment display 1", "2" corresponding to the indication of the pressing location of "red 7 design" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "right, middle, left" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. The corresponding "6" is displayed in the push order. On the other hand, in the case of "segment display 2", "6" corresponding to the indication of the pressing place of "red 7 design" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "right, middle, and so on" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. The corresponding "9" is displayed in the order of "left". That is, looking at the special display LED 612 as a whole, "26" is displayed in the case of "segment display 1" and "69" is displayed in the case of "segment display 2", and the segments differ from each other. It will be displayed.

  Then, “Seg Display 1” and “Seg Display 2” shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 are set as the first display mode and the second display mode as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the special display LEDs 612 (612a, 612b) while indicating the same instruction content. In the above-mentioned specific example, the display mode "26" can be changed to the display mode "69". As described above, by performing display change in any of the easily distinguishable display modes, in the slot machine 1, it is possible to play the game as if the instruction content indicated on the special display LED 612 at first glance for the player is changed. Even if it is possible to realize the effect, even if the instruction content before and after the change of the display mode can be grasped, when the display mode is intentionally changed with the same instruction content, a special effect is performed. It is possible to impress an impression and to increase the sense of expectation for the game result.

  Further, as another example of display change between the indication function indication, indication function indication by an easily distinguishable indication form (hereinafter also referred to as “clear indication aspect”) as exemplified in FIGS. 80 and 81, As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the first display aspect and the second display aspect are displayed using the indication function display according to the display aspect difficult to identify (hereinafter also referred to as “indistinct display aspect”). As, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed. 80 and 81 use two 7-segment LEDs without dots, and FIGS. 83 and 84 differ in using one 7-segment LED with dots, but the 7-segment LEDs with dots are different. This makes it possible to display using a 7-segment LED without dots, so that the difference is not affected.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player changes the degree of clarity of the display mode in the special display LED 612 by performing the display change between the “clear display mode” and the “indistinct display mode”. The player's expectation for the game can be enhanced. In particular, clear information is provided to the player, such as when the display mode is changed from "indistinct display mode" to "clear display mode", it becomes easier to grasp the instruction content. The player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when performing the display change to make the clearness of the display in the special display LED 612 variable, the display change is performed in a manner easy to be noticed by the player. It is possible to strongly give the player the impression that an effect is being produced. Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment suppresses the monotonization of the game because the player can be conscious that the display mode of the indication function display may change for each game, and the special display An effect of enhancing interest in the LED 612 and enhancing the fun of the game is exhibited.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode in the special display LED 612 is not limited to one change of changing from the first display mode to the second display mode. To give a specific example using FIG. 81, when the bell combination (AT7) in the 6-order push order with the reverse push as the proper push order is selected as the winning hand, “1st display mode in the special display LED 612b is Assuming that “C” indicating the pressing order of “right first (2 options)” is displayed, thereafter, in a period satisfying the condition of the timing of display change as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. , “C” and “6” are alternately displayed at high speed, and “6” indicating the pressing order of “right, middle, left” is displayed as the final second display mode You may Even when "C" is displayed on the special display LED 612b until the first stop button is pressed when such a change in display mode is performed, it is first determined that the stop operation should be the reel stop button 211c. Since there is no change, the instruction function display of the correct instruction content is performed. This is the same even if "6" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Then, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to "6" by pressing the second stop button, it becomes clear that the reel stop button 211b should be operated for the second stop, so the player can make six selections. The stop operation can be performed in the proper order of pressing. On the other hand, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b remains "C" until the second stop button is pressed, the player selects the reel stop button for the second stop operation from any of the reel stop buttons 211a and 211b. Then, when the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to "6", an answer of the proper pressing order in the game is displayed (correct display).

  When the correct display regarding the stop operation is performed by changing the display mode in this manner, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the special display LED 612 is limited to the extent that indicates the proper pressing order. The teaching of whether the answer is correct or not may be performed by a display (for example, the image display 500) managed by the sub substrate 510. However, if the display mode on the special display LED 612 is changed and displayed correctly before all the reels 301 stop (before all reels stop), the instruction content indicated as the correct operation stop operation in the display mode after the change However, there is a possibility that a stop operation for a reel that has already been stopped may be instructed. Therefore, it is preferable to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to display the proper pressing order (the order of pressing the correct answer) after all the reels have stopped, and to turn off the special display LED 612 after a predetermined time has elapsed It is desirable to do. However, even if the stop operation of the reel 301 is performed in the pressing order that is not the correct answer, when there is a payout of the medal (the game value), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the pressing order of the correct answer is not displayed. It is desirable to make the special display LED 612 display a payout immediately after all reels stop. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the processing for displaying the correct answer as described above, it is possible to entertain the player through the unit game while preventing the deterioration of interest due to the solution being understood in the middle of the game. .

  In addition, when changing the display mode with the above-mentioned high-speed change, among the display modes to be changed at high speed, the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is included among the display modes to be changed at the end. It may be displayed, or after the high-speed change is performed in a state where the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is not included, the display mode indicating the correct instruction content may be displayed finally. And if a plurality of types of change patterns for high-speed change are prepared, the degree of expectation can be differentiated depending on the change pattern, so that the game characteristic can be enhanced. Note that such a change pattern of the display mode is not limited to the “high speed” change, and may be a change pattern that allows the player to recognize that the display mode is changing. Specifically, for example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds. Further, for example, the display mode is changed in the shortest time from the pressing operation of the start lever 210 to the start of pressing the stop button (the required time in a state where the wait timer is up and there is no wait). It is also good. Also, for example, assuming that the index position of the reel 301 is farthest away, the display mode may be changed in the time required for the reel 301 to go around.

  In addition, as another example of display change between indication function displays, an example using a display mode of grouped indication function displays can be mentioned. The “display mode of the grouped indicatory function display” mentioned here is a group of a plurality of instruction contents grouped into a group according to a predetermined rule, and means a display mode (group display) set corresponding to the group, For example, it is possible to group instruction contents in which the reels (reel stop button) to be stopped first are the same.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram for describing an example of group display in the indication function display. FIG. 88 shows a display example of the special display LED 612b. The description other than the “group display” column is the same as FIG. 81, so the description will be omitted. According to FIG. 88, first, it is assumed that the group display of “L” is performed for the instruction content (specifically, No. 1, 2, 7, 10) in which the reel to be stopped is the left reel 301a. First, it is assumed that the group display "c" is performed for the instruction content (specifically, No. 3, 4, 8, 11) in which the reel to be stopped is the middle reel 301b, and the reel to be stopped first is It is assumed that group display of “r” is performed for the instruction content (specifically, No. 4, 5, 9, 12) that is the right reel 301c.

  When changing the display mode of the special display LED 612b using the “group display” shown in FIG. 88, the first display mode is “group display” of the correct instruction content regarding the reel to be stopped first. As a second display mode, the special display LED 612b displays the "segment display" of the correct instruction content regarding the reel to be stopped after the second. Specifically, for example, when the bell combination (AT7) in a 6-order push order in which the reverse push is the proper push order is selected as the winning combination, “r” is displayed as the first display mode, and then [ "6" is displayed as a 2nd display mode in the period which satisfy | fills the conditions of the timing of the timing of a display change which were demonstrated by 11-3-4-3-1. When such a display change is performed, while the first display mode is displayed, the player can only obtain information that the right reel 301 c should be stopped first, but in the second display mode Since it is possible to obtain information on the reels to be stopped after the second when changing, it is possible to be interested in changing the display mode.

  It should be noted that the display change between the indication function displays as described above is particularly effective in a game period (for example, chance zone) in which the degree of awarding of the benefit is changed depending on whether or not the proper pressing order is hit. It can bring about a high effect. That is, the player who is playing a game like this desires to change the display mode and change from partial instruction content to complete instruction content, and pays attention to the display trend in the special display LED 612 In addition to enhancing the gameplay, the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 can be enhanced.

(2) Display change between the indication function indication and the indication function indication As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the indication function indication in the special indication LED 612 is pressed to the reel stop button 211 At the specific timing at which the operation can be accepted, it is only necessary to indicate the correct instruction content regarding the “proper reel stop operation” to be executed next. For example, the game period before (or after) the specific timing In the special display LED 612, a display mode other than the indication function display may be displayed. Therefore, in the following, as an example of changing the display between the indication function display and the indication function other than the indication function display, in the special display LED 612, a simple example of changing the display mode from the indication mode other than the indication function display to the indication mode of the indication function display Show.

  For example, the 7-segment LED is used as the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display timing at the first change timing described in [11-3-4-3-1]. Suppose that the display mode is changed. Segment display of "0" to "3" is prepared as the first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode other than the indication function indication, that is, a indication aspect not included in the "segment display" used in the indication function indication, and the indication content is not associated. On the other hand, segment display of "4" to "7" is prepared as the second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode used in the indication function display, and the instruction content is associated with each of the second indication modes.

  In such a case, first, after the start lever is pressed, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the first display mode, and the freeze control of the reel 301 is executed before the stop button press acceptance is started. Then, during execution of the freeze control, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is sequentially changed to “1”, “2”, “3”, and as the second display mode, for example, before the freeze control ends. Display "5". Thereafter, the stop button pressing acceptance is started after the end of the freeze control, and the player performs the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 in accordance with the instruction content indicated by the display mode of “5”. Here, "5" displayed in the second display mode is determined in advance based on the result of the winning combination lottery. By changing the display mode as described above, what is initially displayed as "0" is increased during freeze control, so it is possible to give the player a pleasure as to how many the number increases. it can. And, by making it possible to obtain a more advantageous game result as the final value is higher, it is possible to make the player have a great interest in the result of changing the display mode.

  Moreover, in the above simple example, before and after the change of the display mode by using the display similar to the display mode by the instruction function display (in this example, any of them is similar in the numbers) as the display mode other than the instruction function display. Can give the player a sense of continuity. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to use similar displays, and different display may be changed from a display mode clearly different from the display mode by the indication function display. In such a case, when the different display is displayed on the special display LED 612, the player can be made to foresee that the display mode is to be changed, and the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced.

(3) Other Display Modifications The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt various display methods to realize indication function display under the control of the main board 409, but special functions other than those described above The example of a display change in display LED612 is shown.

  As an example of such a display change, as a display (special display LED 612) for displaying an indication function, the display change may be performed using a display different from the segment LED used in the above description. . Such another type of display corresponds to, for example, a segment LED (so-called full color LED display) capable of displaying a plurality of colors, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a lamp and the like.

  For example, when the special display LED 612 is a full color LED display, the display color can be changed to red when the display mode is changed while the indication function display is normally performed in green. In general, if it is easier for the player to notice the red color than the green color, it is easy for the player to notice the change in the display mode by changing the display color and changing the display mode in this manner. be able to. In addition, when the display colors of the normal time and the time of change are visually similar colors (for example, colors of warm colors such as red and orange, colors of cold colors such as blue and purple) In addition, it is possible to add fine gameplay that only the player who plays while watching the display color in the special display LED 612 can quickly recognize that the display mode is changed.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, it is possible not only to change the display color as in the case of using a full color LED display, but also to change the brightness of the display itself. That is, when changing the display mode, if the display brightness in the special display LED 612 is made higher than usual, it is possible to foresee the player that the display mode is changed, and the effect of enhancing the game fun Can be expected. In addition, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case of using the segment LED.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a dot display, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Although the dot display is less diverse in display mode than the liquid crystal display, it has an advantage over the liquid crystal display in terms of suppression of power consumption and monotony of control signals. In addition, even when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or the like as described above, management by the main substrate 409 does not change.

  As described above in [11-3-4-3] and later, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that displays an indication function display on the special display LED 612 managed by the main substrate 409, The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the middle of one game (unit game). Here, the basic flow of the indication function indication in the slot machine 1 is that the instruction content of the indication function is determined based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery (winning combination lottery) regarding the winning combination, and the instruction An indication function display indicating the content is performed. And the winning combination lottery is performed only once in the unit game. Therefore, from the player's viewpoint, the indication function display is shown in one display mode based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the unit game, the special display is performed even though the winning combination does not change in the unit game. The LED 612 can display a plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the lottery result has changed in the unit game. And specifically, even if the display mode (for example, "00" in the first example of the indication function display) indicating the content of the instruction with high possibility of the low expectation player is indicated, the possibility of the high expectation player is high. It can be expected to change to a display mode (for example, "2C" in the first example of the indication function display) indicating the contents of an instruction, and the effect of maintaining the game interest of the player throughout the unit game Play.

  Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can enhance the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 by making it possible to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the unit game as described above. It is possible to provide a gaming style in which the game is advanced while paying attention to the special display LED 612. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, compared to the conventional gaming machine in which there is a tendency that excessive emphasis is placed on effect display on a liquid crystal display (corresponding to the image display 500 in the slot machine 1) etc. By providing a novel gaming style, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the player.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a carry-over combination (for example, a bonus combination such as “two types of BB” shown in FIG. 49) capable of carrying over the winning flag after the next game is selected as the winning combination. When the indication function display relating to the winning combination is performed, the indication function indication may not be completed in one game of the winning game, and the indication function indication is displayed over a plurality of games from the winning game or the subsequent games. You may do so. Specifically, for example, when a BB combination (a carryover combination) and a watermelon combination (a non-precedence combination) are simultaneously won in a winning combination lottery, the winning game indicates an instruction to arrange the symbol combinations of the BB combination. It is assumed that the indication function display is performed. However, in this winning game, if the symbol combination of the BB combination does not stop on the active line and the BB combination does not win, the indication function indication displayed in the winning game is continuously displayed until the next game. You may In addition, even if the indication function indication is temporarily turned off between the winning game and the next game, the indication function indication of the next game may be displayed in such a display mode as taking over the indication function indication of the winning game. By doing this, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment enables display of indication functions across a plurality of games, and teaches opportunities beyond the unit game (one game) to obtain an advantageous result for the player, People's expectations can be greatly enhanced.

[11-3-5. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 performs the indication function display with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the indication function generation processing, while the information similar to the display contents (instruction contents) in the indication function display By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction content is notified to the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510). As described above in the description of FIG. 55, the instruction information command transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the peripheral substrate when the instruction function occurs can identify the group including the winning combination selected in the game. It is transmitted in a form (a command obtained by grouping winning combinations).

  A specific example of such a command obtained by grouping winning combinations will be described. First, for example, when “AT1”, in which the orderly pressing is the proper pressing order, is selected as the winning combination, and all the proper pressing orders are displayed on the indication function display, “ordering” is used as a command grouping the winning combinations. Information such as “Welcome to the Bell Group” is notified. Here, the winning combination "AT2" is also grouped into "a push order group of forward push" because the proper push order is forward push. Therefore, even when "AT2" is selected as the winning combination when all the proper pressing orders are displayed in the indication function display, the same command as in the case of "AT1" is notified. Further, for example, when “AT 1” is selected as the winning combination and only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper pushing order in the indication function display, “first stop is selected as a command that grouped the winning combinations. Information indicating that the player has won the pushing order bell group, which is the left reel, is notified. Here, the winning combinations "AT2" to "AT4" are also grouped into the "pushing bell group in which the first stop is the left reel" because the first stop in the proper pushing order is the left reel. Therefore, even when only one of the first stop reels in the proper pressing order is displayed on the indication function display, the same as in the case of “AT1” is obtained when any of “AT2” to “AT4” is selected as the winning combination. The command will be notified. Then, the sub board 510 that has received such an instruction information command causes the image display body 500 or the like to display an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display (instruction generation effect process).

  That is, when generating an indication function, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment causes the image display body 500 to display the navigation display having the same contents as the indication contents in the indication function while displaying the indication function with the special display LED 612. In this manner, the instruction content is notified in a manner that the player can more easily recognize.

  In addition, as described above in the description of step S31 in FIG. 54 and the like, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the indication function display controlled by the main board 409. If the display contents do not need to be present and do not violate the contents of the instruction by the indication function display, the display mode to be displayed by the sub board 501 in the navigation display may be determined from a plurality of display modes (one-to-n correspondence ).

  FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing a specific display example of the indication function display of the first example. In FIG. 89, a display example of the navigation display is shown in a form corresponding to the display example of the indication function display exemplified in FIG. 80 and FIG. According to FIG. 89, first, when the indication function display is "00", that is, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, since there is no substantial instruction content, it is not necessary for the player to aim for a special symbol, and the pushing order may be arbitrarily selected. Such a display is performed when, for example, the player has won a replay without any order during AT. Therefore, "?" Is displayed on all the reels as a display example of the navigation display.

  Next, when the indication function display is "02", that is, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "2" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Although it is not necessary to aim at a special symbol, it is required to stop the reel 301 in the stopping order of pinching (left, right, middle). Such a display is given when the player has won the bells of "AT3" and "AT4" during AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, by displaying "1" at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and "2" at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c, The order of stopping right and middle pinching is taught. In this navigation display, furthermore, the display color of the image showing the stop order is made yellow to recall the bell or the reel to be stopped next (for example, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won) When all the reels 301 are rotating, the first reel is to be stopped, and when two reels are rotating, the second corresponding reel is to be stopped) than the image showing the other stop order It may be highlighted.

  Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content to be displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output, specifically, the first reel to be stopped When the left reel 301a is the left reel 301a, there is an example in which an audio such as "It's left!" Is output at the timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When voice output is performed, different voice outputs (for example, characters, lines, etc.) are made based on the type of winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.), gaming state (high probability state, low probability state, etc.) Different into intonation can be used properly. In this manner, by performing navigation display including voice output, notification of instruction content to the player can be made more reliable, and navigation display with change according to the game situation can be provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected.

  Next, when the indication function display is "2C", this means that "2" is displayed on the special display LED 612a and "C" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Is required to stop the right reel 301c first while aiming at the red 7 pattern, and thereafter, for the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b, it is required to select the second stop while aiming at the red 7 pattern Be Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, for example, when preparing special replay roles with different stop forms depending on the order of pushing, such an instruction function display is performed when the special replay role is won, whereby the proper order of pushing is determined. When the stop operation is performed, it is possible to realize the reel effect that the specific symbol alignment is stopped. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation, “1” is shown at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c, and “?” Indicating the stop order unknown is shown at the corresponding positions of the other reels 301a and 301b. Teaches only the first stop of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, in order to teach the standard of the pressing place, the effect display of "Aim for the red 7 pattern" is performed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by enabling the indication function indication and the navigation indication to be displayed in parallel, it is possible to more reliably convey the instruction contents by the indication function to the player.

  FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing an example of display periods by various displays and the like. In FIG. 90, various displays and the like are described on the vertical axis, and display periods, such as at which timing in the progress of one game shown in the horizontal axis direction, display and transmission are performed, etc. .

  First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 90 will be described. In the following description, other timing charts are used in the same format, but the way of looking at each timing chart is the same, so the description of the items will be omitted.

  The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, this means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510.

  The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main substrate 409, and means "display" when the instruction function 802 is ON, and the special function display LED 612 performs the instruction function display. When the indication function 802 is OFF, this means "not displayed", and the indication function indication is not performed by the special display LED 612.

  The number of payouts 803 corresponds to the number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game, and when the number of payouts 803 is ON, it means "display", and the number of payouts is displayed by the special display LED 612. When the payout number 803 is OFF, this means "not displayed", and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Information on the number of dispensed sheets is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be redisplayed even after power-off or the like depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 or the program processing.

  The segment error 804 corresponds to the fact that the details (for example, type and content) of the error are displayed on the segment LED when an error is detected, and when the segment error 804 is ON, it means "display" and the special display LED 612 The details of the error are notified at (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, this means "not displayed", and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

  The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to navigation display of an instruction function controlled by the sub substrate 510, and when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means "display", and navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, this means "non-display", and navigation display is not performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with contents that do not violate the display contents in the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, data relating to the display by the sub substrate 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub substrate 510, and data can be read back appropriately even if a power failure occurs. I assume.

  The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to the fact that the details (for example, type and content) of the error are displayed on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. The details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, this means "non-display", and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, notification of the error is performed with contents that do not violate the notification in the segment error 804.

  The error occurrence 807 indicates the occurrence status of an error, but in this figure, it may be read as that the main substrate 409 detects the error. When error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error occurred (error was detected) at the timing when it became ON, and when error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error occurred (error was detected. Not mean). If the error occurrence 807 is turned on after the occurrence of the error 807, it means that the error is eliminated at the timing when the occurrence of the error 807 is turned off.

  The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 is managed by the main substrate 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub substrate 510.

  Further, in FIG. 90 and the other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 of the reel stop buttons 211 a to 211 c corresponding to the reels 301 a to 301 c in rotation, of which the first pressing operation is performed. It means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 on which the second stop operation of the reel 301 is performed, and the “third stop button” is the third (that is, the last) reel 301. Means the reel stop button 211 of which the stop operation has been performed.

  Next, a display period (including a transmission period and the like) of each display and the like shown in FIG. 90 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 90 is shown under the situation where a game is played without an error occurring during AT at which the pointing function is executed, and a payout does not occur in the game.

  In FIG. 90, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the indication function 802, the indication operation display in the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation on all the reels 301 from the timing when the depression operation of the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable (the third stop button is pressed) Will be displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of the rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the indication function display. In the example of FIG. 90, the start of the navigation display is preceded by the start of the display of the indication function, but the navigation display is displayed based on the contents of the indication information command, and the contents of the indication information command are indication As the instruction content in the function display is the same, there is no change in that the navigation display is performed with the same contents as the instruction function display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to such display order.

  Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 90, the timing of “stop button pressing acceptance start” and the timing when the instructing function 802 is turned on appear the same, but strictly speaking, after the pressing acceptance of the reel stop button 211 is started The special display LED 612 does not start to display the indication function. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of “stop button pressing acceptance start”, and in the processing of the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409 Also, the indication function display is executed prior to the timing when the stop button pressing acceptance start is started. The timings of such “stop button pressing acceptance start” and “instruction function display” are the same as in the timing chart shown in the other example.

  Further, in FIG. 90, the start timing of the indication function display in the special display LED 612 is the timing when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable, and the start timing of the navigation display in the image display 500 is the rotation start time of the reel 301 However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in the period from when the start lever 210 is pressed until the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable. May be started.

  Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that in FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing another example of display periods by various displays and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 91 is the same as that of FIG. 90 in that the game was performed without an error occurring during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, but shows a situation where a payout has occurred in the game. It is different. In FIG. 91, in addition to the game progress shown on the horizontal axis in FIG. 90, “Payout start” in which payout of gaming value (medal) is started after stopping all reels, “Payout complete with payout completed” And "the medal input (BET possible)" for the start of the next game is added.

  According to FIG. 91, when the payout for gaming is performed, the number of payouts is displayed on the special display LED 612, but the display also indicates an instruction function until “the third stop button is pressed” on the special display LED 612. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. Further, in FIG. 91, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is up to “pressing the third stop button”, but as another example, it may be continuously displayed until “payment start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the number of payouts 803.

[11-3-6. Instruction function related processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, an instruction function related process by the peripheral substrate (specifically, for example, the sub substrate 510) will be described. The start timing of the instruction function related process does not necessarily have to be after the completion of the instruction function generation process (step S61 in FIG. 57). For example, it may be performed in parallel from the middle of the instruction function generation process. In such a case, it is possible to shorten the time required for the overall processing, but it is preferable that it is at least after the timing at which the aforementioned instruction information command and conditional device command can be received.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 60, the condition device command transmitted from the main substrate 409 is received. In the condition device command, information on the condition device (which may be a plurality of condition devices) whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery regarding the winning combination performed on the main substrate 409 is converted into a command format It is

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the above-mentioned conditional device command does not have information to the extent that the reception side (sub substrate 510) of the command can completely identify the winning combination. It is preferable that the information on the condition device to be notified at is a degree of information capable of identifying the grouped winning combinations (or condition devices). Further, in particular, when the indication function display is not executed, the sub-substrate 510 can not identify or judge the proper pressing order or pressing position of the winning combination in the game by the command transmitted from the main substrate 409. It is required to Specifically, for example, although it can be understood that the sub-substrate 510 that has received the command has won the push order bell, the breakdown of the winning combination (which of the “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) is No degree is preferred. In this regard, as described in [11-1], the command for notifying the grouped winning combination when the indication function display is not executed may be regarded as a "conditional device command". The specific format of these commands may be any command format that is generally used. For example, among the bits assigned to all winning combination groups, the winning combination group in the game may be a bit In this case, a form in which the notification is made and a form in which the identification number associated with the winning combination in the game is notified can be considered.

  Although not shown, the sub-substrate 510 receives each condition flag (special status flag, hell status flag) used in the instruction function generation process by the main substrate 409 immediately before and after the conditional device command is received in step S701. It is assumed that the value of (including) is received by a command or the like. In addition, it is assumed that the AT flag, the AT internal flag and the like are also transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510 and the like by a command and the like as appropriate. Also, the instruction information command described above is also transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the sub substrate 510. In addition, as a transmission aspect of the command transmitted from the main board 409, an aspect may be such that individual commands are transmitted at individual timings, or a command in which several pieces of command information are combined into one is transmitted. It may be an aspect.

  After the conditional device command is received in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the hell state flag is ON. If it is determined that the hell state flag is ON (YES in step S702), the process of step S703 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not ON (OFF) (step S702) (NO), the process of step S721 described later is performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not a "precursor game number command" for notifying the number of games of the prognostic game has been received. The "precursor game number command" is transmitted as a command to the peripheral substrate at an appropriate timing when execution of the precursor game is determined in the instruction function generation processing of the main substrate 409 (precursor game flag ON). . If it is determined that the precursor game number command has been received (YES in step S703), the process of step S704 is performed, and if it is determined that the precursor game number command has not been received (NO in step S703), As processing of Step S718, processing for performing various kinds of effect display is performed, and the instruction function related processing is ended.

  When the process of step S 718 is performed, the player is not in the hell state, and the precursor game is not started. For example, the rare combination is selected as the winning combination as a specific “various effect display”. In this case, a predetermined cut-in effect or a suggestion effect screen for a winning combination is displayed.

  In step S704, it is determined whether the "continuous effect flag" is OFF. The “continuous effect flag” is an internal flag that is turned “ON” when “prediction effect” including “continuous effect” is being executed.

  Here, the "continuous effect" in the first embodiment will be described. The "continuous effect" corresponds to an effect in which display etc. is performed with continuous effect contents over a predetermined number of games from one game to a plurality of games, among the accompaniment effects executed during the accompaniment game , At the end of the "continuous effect", an effect result indicating (recommend / notify) the success or failure of the special game (AT in this case) is displayed. Therefore, the result of the continuous presentation is also the result of the precursor presentation, and more specifically, the result of the precursor game.

  Here, an example of the relationship between the “prediction effect” and the “continuous effect” in the first embodiment will be described. For example, "title display" is performed in the first game of the prognostic effect. This title display may be a display that indicates the contents of the subsequent continuous effect (for example, "the main character vs. enemy A battle start!" Or a display that simply indicates the start of the continuous effect (for example, "determination chance start !) Etc. Then, in the second game after the prognostic effect (corresponding to the first game after the continuous effect), the content of the effect of the continuous effect (corresponding to the "continuous effect content" described later) is displayed. Then, in the final game of the continuous effect (which is also the final game of the prognostic effect), the result by the continuous effect (in this case, whether or not to shift to AT, but may be transition to another advantageous gaming state) is announced (Suggest / teaching) It should be noted that the next game in which the display of the continuous effect content has been finished may be used as the final game of the continuous effect to announce the result by the continuous effect.

  In the following description of the instruction function related process, "continuous effect" means continuous effect on such AT transition. In the case where the omen effect and the continuous effect are executed over the “plural games”, the “plural games” is a plurality of games based on a game (this game) in which an internal lottery concerning a winning combination is performed for each game. It may be a pseudo multiple game created by fluctuating the reel 301 a plurality of times during one main game.

  If it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is OFF (YES in step S704), the process of step S705 is performed, and if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (ON). (NO of step S704), the process of step S711 is performed.

  In step S 705, a continuous effect generation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate “prediction effect (may be regarded as continuous effect)”. In the above-described example, when the omen effect is generated, the title display is performed in the first game of the omen effect, and the continuous effect is generated in the remaining game of the omen effect, so the continuous effect is generated by the continuous effect generation lottery It can also be considered as deciding whether or not to

  FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining the lottery table used for the continuous effect occurrence lottery. FIG. 92 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is ON, and FIG. 93 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is OFF. In both FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, distribution is made so as to draw a lottery whether or not to execute the prognostic effect (or the continuous effect) based on the number of prognostic games at that time (that is, the number of remaining prognostic games). Is set.

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, when the number of remaining precursor games is 5 or more or 1 or less, the generation of the precursor effect is not won, and the number of remaining precursor games is 2 to 4 Only if there is a chance to win the occurrence of precursory effects. Moreover, in the lottery tables of FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, it is always made to win the occurrence of the prognostic effect (255/255) at least when the number of the remaining prog games is 2 games. Also, when the AT is internally won (FIG. 92) and the AT is not internally won (FIG. 93), the AT internally wins if the AT is internally won. In the stage where the number of remaining precursor games is larger than in the case where the player is not internally elected, it is easier to win the generation of the precursor effect. By performing a continuous effect occurrence lottery using such a lottery table, an expectation degree of achieving a result advantageous to the player of AT winning as the effect continues when the indication effect (or continuous effect) occurs is determined. It can be raised.

  A breakdown example of prognostic effects according to the remaining prognostic game number will be described. In the continuous effect occurrence lottery, for example, when the occurrence of the accompaniment effect is won when the remaining accompaniment game number is 2, the title display is made in the first game (since it is immediately executed, the remaining accompaniment game number 2) The second game (the remaining precursor game number 1) causes the display of the first game (the first game of the continuous effect; the same applies hereinafter) of the continuous effect contents and the result by the predictive effect (or the continuous effect) Is displayed.

  Also, in the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the occurrence of the accompaniment effect is won when the remaining accompaniment game number is 3, the title in the first game (immediately executed, the remaining accompaniment game number 3) The display is performed, and the display of the first game (the first game of the continuous effect) of the continuous effect content is performed in the second game (the remaining precursor game number 2), and the third game (the remaining precursor game number 1) is performed. While the display of the second game (the second game of the continuous effect) of the continuous effect content is performed, the display of the result by the prognostic effect (or the continuous effect) is performed.

  Also, in the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the occurrence of the accompaniment effect is won when the remaining accompaniment game number is 4, the title in the first game (the remaining accompaniment game number 4 because it is immediately executed) The display is performed, and the display of the first game of the continuous effect contents (the first game of the continuous effects) is performed in the second game (the remaining apogee number of games 3), and the third game (the remaining apogee number of games 2) is performed. The display of the second game of the continuous effect contents (the second game of the continuous effect) is performed, and the display of the third game of the continuous effect contents (the third game of the continuous effect) in the fourth game (the remaining precursor game number 1) And the display of the result by the omen effect (or continuous effect) is performed.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the leading effect has been won in the continuous effect occurrence lottery in step S705, and if it is determined that the occurrence is won (YES in step S706), the process of step S707 is performed, and the winning is achieved. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (NO in step S706), the instruction function related process is ended.

  Then, in step S 707, with respect to the prognostic effect won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S 705, a continuous effect content lottery for determining the content of the accompaniment effect (or continuous effect) is performed. FIGS. 94 and 95 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for describing a lottery table used for continuous effect content lottery. In the case other than the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 94 is used, and in the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 95 is used.

  In FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, four types of "weak story", "strong story", "weak battle", and "strong battle" are prepared as effect contents, and based on ON / OFF of the AT internal flag, respectively. Lottery is done by different distribution. These four types of effect contents have the relationship of "weak story" <"weak battle" <"strong story" <"strong battle" as the degree of expectation (reliability) leading to AT winning, and they are similar. In the content of the presentation (story system, battle system), the direction of "strong" is made to have higher reliability than "weak".

  From the above, the reliability (predicted degree leading to AT winning) in the omen effect (or the continuous effect) is the number of continuing games of the omen effect (determined by the continuous effect generation lottery using FIGS. 92 and 93) or It can be seen that this is variably realized by the effect content of the prognostic effect (determined by the continuous effect content lottery using FIGS. 94 and 95).

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the continuous effect content lottery is performed in the special mode (using FIG. 95), the selected effect content is determined to always continue four games including the title display. That is, when being controlled to the special state, in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705, when the remaining front game number is 4, it is assumed that the front effect will always be generated. Even if any effect content is selected in the subsequent effect content lottery in the subsequent step S 707), the indication effect can be continued for four games. The breakdown of the prognostic effects of the four games is that, as described above, the first one game is the title display, and the contents of the continuous effects are displayed in the remaining three games, and in the final game in particular Is displayed.

  When the effect content of the continuous effect to be displayed as the omen effect is determined by the above continuous effect content lottery, in step S708, the generation of the omen effect based on the determined effect content is started. Then, since the indication effect is being executed, the continuous effect flag is set to ON (step S709), and the instruction function related process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (that is, while the accompaniment effect is being executed), it is determined as the process of step S711 whether or not the accrual game number is zero. The precursor game number can be confirmed by referring to the precursor game number command confirmed to be received in step S703. Then, if it is determined that the precursor game number is 0 (YES in step S711), the processing in step S712 is performed as processing accompanying the end of the precursor game. If it is determined that the precursor game number is not 0 (NO in step S711), since the precursor game is in progress and the indication effect is being executed, the process of step S717 is that the indication effect is currently being executed. Display (continuous effect display) is performed. The precursor effect displayed in the process of step S 717 is a precursor effect based on the effect contents determined in step S 707, and is accurately referred to by referring to the number of games after the precursor effect is started. It becomes possible to display an effect.

  In step S712, it is determined whether the special state flag is ON. As described above, ON / OFF of the special state flag is set in the instruction function generation process by the main board 409, and in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, a precursor game (prediction effect) is performed. It may be controlled to a special state (become special mode) after it has finished. When it is determined that the special status flag is ON (YES in step S712), a predetermined display (special status screen display) that allows the player to recognize that it is the special mode is displayed as the processing in step S713. After outputting, the instruction function related process ends.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the special state flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in step S712), it is determined whether the AT internal flag is ON (step S714). If it is determined that the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S714), this means that the continuous effect and precursor game have ended in the AT internal winning state, and thus the AT game is started. As a process, after outputting a predetermined display (AT start screen) indicating the start of AT, the instruction function related process is ended. If it is determined that the AT internal flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S714), various effect displays are output as the process of step S716, and the instruction function related process is ended.

  Next, the process after step S721 will be described. The process after step S721 is a process performed when the hell state flag is ON, that is, controlled to the hell state. The situation controlled to the hell state is, for example, when a precursor game is played after the special mode, and when the lottery table of FIG. 63 is used, the AT first hit is not won in the hell state.

  As processing in such a hell state, first, in step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is OFF. Since this process is the same as the process of step S704, the details will be omitted.

  Then, if it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is OFF, after the continuous effect generation lottery is performed (not shown but similar to step S705), the lottery of the continuous effect content is performed in step S722, In step S723, the generation of a pro-effect according to the lottery result is started, the continuous effect flag is turned on in step S724, and the instruction function related process is ended. The processes of steps S722 to S724 are the same as the processes of steps S707 to S709 described above, and thus the details thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in step S 721 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF, then a predictive effect display (continuous effect display) is performed as the process of step S 725, and the instruction function related process is ended. . The process of step S 725 is similar to the process described in step S 717.

  As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 60, the control processing managed by the peripheral substrate (sub-substrate 510) is performed regarding the state (for example, a prognostic game or special mode) which can be positioned as a precursor of AT game. be able to. The determination process (AT game determination process) regarding the end of the AT game and the game number management is performed after the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), and the details thereof are [11-5-3] and the like. I will mention later.

  The above is the description of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but there is no need to have one lottery table used in various internal lottery for controlling such a gaming state, for example, for example A plurality of setting values (for example, four levels from setting values 1 to 4) may be provided, and a lottery table different for each setting value may be used. Specifically, in each set value, a difference (stepwise difference, extreme difference, etc.) is made to the internal lottery probability. In this setting value, as the setting value becomes higher such as setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3 <setting value 4, it is preferable that the lottery probability such as the bonus winning combination or the AT winning ratio be more preferential. For example, since the winning probability of BB1 is determined to be high at the setting value 4 compared to the setting value 1, the possibility of winning the BB1 is high. By providing stepwise setting values in this manner, each setting value has a feature to be used as a clue when the player estimates the setting value, or a setting value according to the management of a hole or the like. It is possible to operate the In addition, it is not restricted to the above setting values.

11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) for stopping the reel which continues to rotate at a constant speed is in a waiting state. FIG. 96 shows, as an example, the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method”. Below, the flow of processing of reel stop control is explained.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, the reel stop control table is selected in accordance with the condition device operated in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device established at step S201 above, the process waits until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is received (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or a state where the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has been pressed. The determination in step S209 is not satisfied until the pressing operation of all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, and the processing in step S202 and subsequent steps is repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c is received (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, "forward press", "pinch press", "middle press", and "middle reverse" There are six ways of pressing, “reverse pinching”, and “reverse pressing”, but in the following description of FIG. 96, attention is first paid to the reel stop button 211 on which these pressing operations were performed first. Then sort in three push order. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is called "forward press", the case where it is the middle reel 301b is called "middle press", and the case where it is the right reel 301c is called "reverse press".

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag (left reel stop flag LF) indicating that the left reel 301a is in the stop state is OFF (LF = 0) and whether the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a is accepted. Do. In step S201, assuming that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) along the stop operation procedure of "forward press" from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202. Is satisfied, and the process moves to step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The term "first reel" as used herein refers to the first reel on which the stop operation is accepted or the first stop. In this example (“forward press”), the stop operation of the left reel 301 a is received first, so the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F = 0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, the first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control tables for the remaining middle reels 301b and right reels 301c are determined. As described above, since the effective line of the slot machine 1 is only two lines of upward and downward right lines and right and downward lines, the stop control table of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b and right reel 301c) is one at this point. It can be decided. In other words, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this will be referred to as a stop, the same applies hereinafter) If it is a symbol with character, select a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the corresponding symbol It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

  Next, at step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c have stopped. In this example, only the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON, and since the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the process after step S202 is executed again, the determination of step S202 is not satisfied because the left reel 301a is already in the stop state, and the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether the flag (medium reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b is in the stopped state is off (MF = 0), and whether the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211 b is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. Then, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this time, this determination is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination based on the reel control table (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above) corresponding to the operating condition device. Run. At this time, the middle reel 301b is the second reel to stop (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216 to turn on the middle reel stop flag MF (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stop state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and in the stop state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is not, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Furthermore, in the processing after the third step S202, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and whether the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c has been accepted. Although the processing of the subsequent steps S218 and S220 is the same as the processing after the above-described step S210 (steps S211 and S213), the detailed description will be omitted.

  Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stop state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process is ended.

  In addition, since the description similar to the above can be performed also in the case of the stop operation procedure of "middle press", details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, since there are some differences from the above description, it will be described below.

  The difference between the “reverse push” stop operation procedure and the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure is in step S 221 (decision of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop processing). is there. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", only the right reel 301c is in the stop state, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stop positions of the right reel 301c, two valid still It is possible to align the corresponding winning combination on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination on any activated line may be prepared, and one of them may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the above-described reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to draw in the winning combination (corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the formation flag as much as possible into the symbol display window 401 (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the player's stop operation of the reel is accepted, the range which can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range where the corresponding winning combination can be drawn, for example, four symbols) Minute) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination in the range, this is drawn into the symbol display window 401 to execute control to stop the reel. Note that the "retractable range" mentioned here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the direction of rotation of the reel after the reel stop operation is received until the reel is stopped. Say. For example, if the drawable range is at most four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotationally moved by four symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, at the time when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, even if there is no corresponding winning combination in the symbol display window 401, the corresponding corresponding winning combination can be drawn in. If so, it is possible to stop the corresponding winning combination by moving it into the symbol display window 401. In addition, by performing this retraction control, even if the player has made the timing of the pressing of the corresponding winning combination somewhat earlier, if there is the winning combination within the retractable range, the winning combination is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a dropout (the fact that the game bonus disappears without being able to obtain the game bonus corresponding to the winning combination without aligning the winning combination).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay role or the push order bell (bell 1, bell 2), etc. is activated, the corresponding winning symbol must be displayed without the need for the player's eyes. Can be aligned. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay role, the bell 1 and the bell 2 etc., the corresponding winning combination of symbols is arranged at intervals of up to four symbols (FIG. See FIG. 46 above). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum draw-in number is four (four frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of at most four as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (push position) It is possible to pull in the line.

  Specifically, for example, when the replay symbol is aligned in the middle when the predetermined replay character is won, focusing on the replay symbol, on the left reel 301a, the other symbols are at maximum between the replay symbol and the replay symbol. Four pieces are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, on the left reel 301a, regardless of the position on the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, the replay symbol is always drawn into any position on the effective line and stopped as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay role is activated. be able to.

  Also, when the result of the internal lottery is a combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. When the bonus combination and the small combination are won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in this winning game, the formation status of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game and the next game. In a game in which the subsequent small winning combination (or replay combination) has not been established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table system. Although there is a reel stop process by a control system separately from this, since a well-known process is applicable also about this, concrete description is omitted here. Further, in the first embodiment, either reel stop processing of the control method or the table method may be executed, and which method is adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combinations are aligned on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed) It is judged whether or not it exists. In FIG. 97, the contents of this determination process will be specifically described.

  When all reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combinations or symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines from the stoppage aspect in the symbol display window 401 (corresponds to the winning combination) Whether or not the combination pattern of the symbols to be displayed is displayed). In particular, the stop point when all the reels 301 are in the stop state is called a stop point.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and the OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game in-progress flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game in-progress flag is OFF (= 0), the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). Describing the determination of the symbol combination by a specific example, if the bonus is shown in FIG. 49 and the like as two types of BB, the symbol combination corresponding to two types of BB is the symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the effective line and (See the condition device “BB1” in FIG. 53). It can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped when such symbol alignment has stopped on any of the oblique lines. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbol has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), the bonus game start processing for the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the processing is ended. Do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is a replay symbol (symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination), and when it is determined that it is a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number as the bet number in the game (MAX bet in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as replay. After the processing of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the symbol combination is a small combination symbol (a symbol combination showing a small combination winning pattern) as the next determination processing It is determined whether or not (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small symbol, in the process of step S309, payout of the specified number of medals according to the small symbol being arranged is executed. put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is informed (notified, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination have been paid out. Then, after the process of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S310), and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a small combination symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 are satisfied, and any on the effective line There is no match for the winning symbols. In addition, the result at this time is also referred to as "missing eyes (combination pattern of separate symbols)". In such a case, a losing process is performed (step S311). In the loss process, when the winning flag which is in the ON (= 1) state at this time is the other winning flag excluding the bonus, the winning flag is set to OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the lost flag is ON (= 1)), the lost flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process of step S311, the determination process ends.

  The processes from step S302 to step S311 described above are processes that are executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, processing in step S312 and subsequent steps performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The processing here is processing executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game time payout symbol is aligned on the activated line. The term "bonus game payout pattern" as used herein is a generic term for symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by being aligned during a bonus game, and more specifically, a bonus game payout pattern (in this example, general) It is a symbol combination corresponding to the same combination as a small combination in which payout is defined in the state or the internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared. If a positive determination is obtained in step S312, payout processing of the specified number of medals is executed according to the prepared bonus game payout symbol (step S313). In the medal payout process, the medal release device 110 pays out the specified number of medals, and displays the medal payout number on the payout number display LED 612. With such medal payout processing, the player is informed (notified and displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout type is paid out.

  Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process of determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 99), and thereafter the determination process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol is not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process is ended. As a pattern to be NO in step S312, it can be considered that the bonus game time payout combination is won but is canceled or the bonus game time payout combination is not won. In the process of step S315, in the case of the former, the establishment flag of the bonus game time payout combination is turned OFF, and in the case of the latter, the loss flag is turned OFF. In the case where a bonus special combination which always wins during the bonus game is prepared, and the bonus special combination is not eliminated at all, the process of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

  The processing of steps S301 to S315 described above is the determination processing of the gaming state performed by the main board 409 (in particular, the CPU 1110). Thereafter, the AT game determination processing is performed in step S320.

  Since the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with the AT function as described above, determination processing regarding continuation of AT game, termination, number-of-games management, etc. for each game (AT game determination processing Need to do). Since the AT game determination process corresponds to a process of performance that affects the generation of an instruction, the main substrate 409 executes.

  Note that the timing at which the AT game determination processing is performed may be any appropriate timing in the determination processing shown in FIG. 97, but here, as an example, each processing of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315. It is assumed that the AT game determination process of step S320 is performed later. The details of the AT game determination process will be described in [11-5-3] with reference to FIG.

[11-5-1. Bonus game start process]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 97 described above is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON (= 1). If the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process moves to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1), and the bonus flag is set to OFF (= 0). Next, at step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the bonus game is cleared. As a result, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the bet number of the specified number of bonus games (in this example, the specified number of BB games is 2).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 to execute error processing. Such a case corresponds to the case where the bonus symbols are aligned although the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). That is, it may happen in some case that some illegal means (for example, a goto action) has been performed, or the slot machine 1 has a failure. Therefore, in the error processing, the lighting of the error lamp 604, and the display of notifying the occurrence of an error on the above-mentioned LED and the like are performed.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end judgment processing]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination processing of step S314 of FIG. 97 described above will be described using FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 97 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the total payout number has exceeded the total payout number (for example, 200) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the total number of payouts in the bonus game (displayed on the number-of-payouts display LED 612 etc.) It may be displayed on this).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game in-progress flag is turned off (= 0) (step S460), and the process is ended.

[11-5-3. AT game judgment processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the AT game determination process. As described above in [11-3-2], etc., the AT game is a game that is executed based on winning the AT in the AT lottery, and when the AT game is being executed, the push order small part ( When the winning combination of “pushing order bell” is won, instruction information such as “appropriate pushing order” is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display) and the teaching effect (navigation display) along the instruction function display is It is displayed on the image display body 500 or the like. The AT game determination process is a determination process regarding the start, continuation, end, and the like of such an AT game, and is executed by the main substrate 409 (in particular, the CPU 1110) that is the control subject of the AT. Hereinafter, an example of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an outline of the AT game will be described. The AT game is started when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the end condition of the AT is satisfied. [11-3-2] As described in the instruction function processing below, when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the AT game is performed. Is started, and the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0) at the end of the AT game. Note that information such as an internal flag related to the AT game such as an AT flag and the number of AT games to be described later is held by a memory (for example, the RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the AT game. Similar information may be stored in a memory (for example, the RAM 1122).

  The conditions under which the AT game is started (conditions in which the AT flag is turned on) are as described in detail in [11-3-2] below, but simply speaking, the state in which AT was won by AT lottery ( When the AT internal flag is ON), the start condition of the won AT is satisfied. Also, as described above, when the AT flag is turned on and the AT game starts, the AT internal flag is turned off.

  In step S501 of FIG. 100, as the first process of the AT game determination process, whether the AT flag has become ON (= 1) by comparing the current AT flag with the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game Determine That is, in step S501, it is determined from the previous game to the current game whether or not the AT flag changes from OFF to ON. It is assumed that the value of the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the AT flag is turned on (YES in step S501), the number of AT games at the start of AT is set (step S502), and the process is ended. The number of AT games at the start of AT (the so-called initial number of games) may be set in advance as the number of fixed games, or may be randomly selected when AT is won, or determined by other methods. Although it may be possible, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined in the above-mentioned instruction function processing is set as the number of AT games at the start of AT.

  By performing the process of step S502, an AT game is started from the next game. At the start of the AT game, the start of the AT game and an effect of designating the number of AT games to the player are performed (for example, display of an AT start screen).

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the AT flag is turned on, that is, if the AT flag is turned off or the AT flag is turned on from the previous game (NO in step S501), the AT flag is turned on. It is determined whether it is ON (= 1) (step S505). If it is determined that the AT flag is ON (YES in step S505), this means that one game in the AT game has been performed, so the value of the number of AT games is decremented by "1" ( Step S506). If it is determined in step S505 that the AT flag is not ON (NO in step S505), since the AT game is not in progress, the process ends.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the number of AT games is added based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions during the AT game, separately from the number of start games determined at the start of the AT game. It is assumed that it has an additional function. When the addition of the AT game number is performed, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the number of AT games to be added (additional game number) is determined. The conditions under which the addition is determined are not particularly limited, and may be a winning of a specific winning combination in the combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Also, the method of determining the number of additional games is not limited to any particular method. Then, the processing of the following steps S507 to S509 is processing that is performed when the function of adding the number of AT games is provided.

  First, in step S507, it is determined whether the overlay flag is ON (= 1). If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S507), processing is performed to add the number of addition games to the current number of AT games (step S508), and the addition flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S509) . As a result, the remaining number of AT games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the AT game advantageous to the player is extended.

  After the process of step S 509 (in the case of not having an overlay function, after the process of step S 506), it is determined whether or not the current number of AT games is “0” (step S 510). Since the condition for ending the AT game is satisfied, the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S511), and the process is ended. At this time, not only the end of the AT game is explicitly indicated to the player, but also information on a series of AT games (for example, the total number of medals paid out in the AT game, the number of AT games continued, etc.) is indicated to the player You may

  If it is determined in step S510 that the current number of AT games is not "0" (NO in step S510), the process ends without changing the AT flag because the AT game end condition is not satisfied. As a result, the AT game continues in subsequent games.

  Note that the AT game determination process described with reference to FIG. 100 is a process example in the case where the game period (AT game period) controlled to the gaming state for AT game is reduced by one for each game. When the AT game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the AT game period is determined by the number of appearances of AT navigation), it is desirable to perform appropriate AT game determination processing according to the subtraction method. .

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an AT start flag) indicating the start of an AT game may be prepared separately from the AT flag for the AT game determination process. The AT start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON (= 1) when the AT first hit lottery is won and the start condition of the AT game is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the AT game determination process, it is determined whether or not the AT start flag is ON in step S501. If the AT start flag is ON, the initial game of AT in step S502. After the number is set, the AT flag may be turned ON and the AT start flag may be turned OFF. If the AT start flag is OFF in step S501, the processing in step S505 and subsequent steps is performed. You should do it.

11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, control of various rendering operations is executed by the sub board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is executed by the sub substrate 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main substrate 409. As described above, the various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. And based on the said command, the presentation aspect prepared beforehand is selected and performed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only by the game (hereinafter, referred to as a one-shot effect mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous effect mode), and the like. Among them, the one-shot effect mode includes effects that indicate the winning flag (suggested effects, notification effects, details will be described later), effects that notify the payout of medals (payout effects, it may be an aspect that notifies up to the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  In contrast to the effect of notifying the player of the winning flag directly (indication effect), the suggested effect refers to an effect of indirectly notifying the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag , Color, etc. are displayed. In addition, the suggestion effect is performed also when there is no such winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, it is an effect of the content that is hard to notice that there is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  The notice effect clearly informs the player of the result regarding the game, such as "Bonus fixed!" And "AT won!", For example, when the winning flag is a bonus combination or when AT is won by AT lottery. It is something that can be done. This effect is more effective when executed especially for a bonus or AT such as a happy winning combination for the player (because there is a possibility that a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when the player wins the AT or the like, it is possible to give meaning to bless that.

  In addition, as the continuous effect mode, there are those corresponding to gaming states such as a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are for clarifying what the gaming state is, and by the player performing these effects (continuous effects), whether the current gaming state is, for example, the general state is bonus internal It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is a state or not.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous effect mode corresponding to the above-mentioned gaming state (general state, bonus internal state, bonus state) but also [11-3-3] and the like. The continuous rendering can be performed in a mode that suggests or teaches whether to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) that is advantageous to the player, such as a prelude rendering of the AT performed. Further, such continuous effects are not limited to the control by the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-substrate 510), and may be controlled by the main substrate 409. Furthermore, such continuous effects may be completed in one game, but are continuously performed in a mode in which related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and the result is finally displayed. Is common. In the indication function process of the first embodiment, an example in which the title display of one game is performed first, and the "continuous effect" ranging from one game to a plurality of games is performed, as a display mode of "indication effect" Although explained, it can be said that "prediction effect" is also a continuous effect in the whole. Then, when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, a pro-active effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which a special game is performed in a subsequent game.

  Note that the various presentation modes described above can be executed as display of an image by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a presentation mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, for example, when the player has been playing the game for a long time. The effect mode is not limited to being performed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, in place of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll imitating a character, a movable model or the like, or a side reel (for example, it is arranged at a position different from each reel, and its start and stop are not caused by the player's operation as part of the effect. What is to be performed) or illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating light) may be provided to execute various effects. If such a method is adopted, it is possible to entertain the player sufficiently without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

11-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
A process performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during the game, an error notification is performed according to the type of the detected error. In particular, when the main substrate 409 is an error that can be detected, the error lamp 604 can be turned on (or blinked), and an error display indicating the type of the error can be performed by the special display LED 612. In addition, in the special display LED 612, an indication function indication and a payout number indication are usually performed. In addition, although an error may not be detected, a sudden power failure is also included in the abnormal state.

  When an abnormal state as described above occurs, in order to return to the normal game state, it is necessary to perform error cancellation (in the case of power-off, it is good if error display does not remain after power-supply restoration). The error cancellation method differs depending on the error that occurred, but often requires power off (ON / OFF).

11-7. RAM clear]
Here, the clear (RAM clear) of the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main substrate 409 will be described.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the value of data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in the address range corresponding to each operation at a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error release processing is performed, when the power is turned off / on, a part of the held data in the RAM 1114 may be cleared.

  However, if error cancellation processing is performed while the indication function is displayed or the power is cut off while the medals are being dispensed, the data used for indication function indication and the number of paid out sheets is cleared by the RAM clear. The case where it interferes with the continuation of the game is assumed. In the slot machine 1, in view of such a problem, the target range of the RAM clear in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a data block of the RAM. FIG. 101 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area in which data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area) and is collected at the end of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 101, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of "areas" are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. Further, five types of “clear range 0” to “clear range 4” are defined as the target range of the RAM clear. Each of the clear ranges may include the unused area 1114z.

  First, the clear range of the RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range corresponding to all erasures, which is basically not implemented. That is, the RAM clear in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, in the set value data area 1114a, the data value is not cleared except when the RAM clear is performed in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

  “Clear range 1” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112 t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 101, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the setting value data area 1114a is not cleared.

  “Clear range 2” means a target range in which the RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112 u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 101, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114 d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114 a to the door monitoring timer area 1114 c are not cleared.

  “Clear range 3” means a target range in which the RAM clear is performed at the end of the bonus. Clearing the RAM in clear range 0 to clear 2 requires work by a store clerk or the like as a trigger to execute each RAM clear, but the RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends. To be executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 101, the data areas below the replay input number area 1114 j are targeted, and the set value data area 1114 a to the indication function display area 1114i is not cleared.

  The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM clear is performed when the power is simply turned off / on. That is, when the power is turned off / on without the setting change or the reset operation being performed, the data area which is the target range in the “clear range 3” is cleared. Then, since the indication function display area 1114i is not included in the “clear range 3”, the indication content of the indication function is not erased by the power OFF / ON.

  “Clear range 4” means a target range in which the RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by internal processing when the start lever 210 is operated with the bet number of medals being determined. Specifically, in the RAM clear at the start of each game, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 101, the data areas below the display flag area 1114l are targeted, and the setting value data area 1114a ~ for interrupt check The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

  Next, each data area shown in FIG. 101 will be briefly described. The set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114 a.

  The door flag area 1114b stores information indicating the open / close state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90), and the door monitoring timer area 1114c contains the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90). The time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

  The lamp ON data area 1114 d stores information on lighting of a lamp (for example, a display lamp arranged on the display panel 501 such as the replay lamp 606 and the start lamp 608). The credit number area 1114 e stores information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals). The credit display area 1114 f stores information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613. The payout number area 1114 g stores information indicating the number of payouts (the number of medals paid out) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game. The payout display area 1114 h stores information for displaying the number of medals paid out on the special display LED 612. In the indication function display area 1114i, information corresponding to the indication content by the indication function for displaying the indication function indication on the special indication LED 612 is stored.

  In the replay input number area 1114 j, the number of game values to be inserted at the time of replay operation (the number of medals inserted at the time of replay) is stored. The interrupt check timer area 1114k stores timer information necessary to execute the interrupt processing.

  In the display flag area 1114l, information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the medal payout number area 1114 m, the payout number of gaming values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the possible number-of-insertable-numbers area 1114 n, information indicating whether or not insertion of gaming value is possible is stored. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of game values inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114 p stores random numbers used by the condition device.

  As described above, in the RAM 1114 of the main substrate 409, efficient memory control can be expected by setting the range in which the RAM clear is performed for each of various actions (during setting change, power OFF / ON, etc.).

  The RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) which can be used as a storage area of the main substrate 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as a program must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, with regard to processing relating to test signals and processing relating to fraud, data relating to a program for the processing is stored in an unused area (for example, unused area 1114z in FIG. 101) outside the defined range. It is permitted. However, use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

  In the slot machine 1, after the power is turned off and the RAM is cleared, it is determined whether or not the data displayed before the RAM is redisplayed is the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or CPU 1118) may redisplay data as much as possible by referring to the data stored in the data area that was not cleared in the RAM at the time of power failure recovery. Although, theoretically, data regarding the display of the number of payouts, data regarding the display of navigation, etc. can be redisplayed, they may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, reference is also made to the data saved to the stack point of the RAM 1114.

11-7. error indication]
Next, an error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining an error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the "notification type" column of FIG. 102 (described later, but some are not errors) is detected, the special display LED 612 indicates it in the "SEG" column. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Among the errors shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 102, the errors other than “communication error (at the time of series code error)” detected by the sub substrate 510 are mainly detected when the error occurs. The substrate 409 is notified. Note that the errors shown in FIG. 102 are a part of errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510 in addition to the illustrated errors.

  An outline of each error shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 102 will be described below.

  The “RAM error” is an error that is notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “Communication error (at the time of series code error)” is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from main board 409 to sub board 510, but since it is detected by sub board 510, special display The LED 612 does not display an error.

  Although “setting change in progress” or “setting check in progress” is not an error, “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and thus is described in FIG. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored, for example, in the setting value data area 1114 a of the RAM 1114. In addition, the notification timing by "during setting change" is at the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing by "during setting confirmation" is at the start of a predetermined setting confirmation operation.

  "Unauthorized payout error" is an error that is notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, the payout count switch (not shown. A switch for counting the number of paid-out medals, for example, except when the medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of the driving means (not shown) of the medal discharging device 110. It is detected when the medal discharge device 110 is turned on. In FIG. 102, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing when the error is detected is “main game non-stop time” or “main game stop time”, specifically, “in detail, It is considered that it is a higher priority to detect when the main game is not stopped. However, the same "HF" is displayed as a segment in the special display LED 612 regardless of which timing it is detected.

  For "inserted medal passing time 1 error", "inserted medal passing time 2 error", "medal passing order 1 error", "medal passing order 2 error", "medal passing time interval error", and "inserted medal retrogression error" This is an error that is notified when there is an abnormality in the process of the medals being inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and reaching the hopper 1110b. The abnormalities referred to here include not only abnormalities concerning the passage route of medals, but also abnormalities due to the insertion of foreign objects other than medals and the like.

  In the slot machine 1, when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 is detected to be passed by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), thereafter, each sensor of the lever sensor, the selector sensor and the chute sensor And the hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected. A lever sensor, a selector sensor, and a shoot sensor are sensors provided to the medal selector 207, and detect passage of medals at predetermined positions provided with the respective sensors (not shown). In addition, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, whereby the medal is inserted via the medal selector 207 and the return rod 213 even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203. The tray 201 is returned to. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (prescribed medal passage sequence), the main substrate 409 is based on the presence / absence of detection in each sensor, detection time, etc. Detect each of the above errors.

  Give an overview of each error. The “inserted medal passing time 1 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including a foreign object other than a medal, etc.) stagnates near the inserted sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the inserted sensor 207b It is detected when continuing for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign objects other than medals) stay in the vicinity of the lever sensor. Specifically, medal detection by the lever sensor takes a predetermined time It is detected when continuing (for example, 500 ms). The detection target period of “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is always set, but the notification timing of the error is set to the medal reception start time (may be at the game end such as after the completion of the payout processing).

  The “medal passing order 1 error” is an error that is notified when medal detection by the selector sensor is performed although medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when the medal sensor is not detected by the lever sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal sensor is detected by the selector sensor. The “medal passing order 2 error” is an error that is notified when medal detection by the shoot sensor is not performed after medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, when a medal is not detected by the shoot sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal sensor is detected by the selector sensor, the error is detected.

  The “medal passage time interval error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a mode that is not assumed during normal times. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, any object is transmitted at a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed at the normal time (that is, the passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). If the situation of passing is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, 5 consecutive times), the error is detected.

  The “inserted medal retrogression error” is an error that is notified when the medal moves along a route other than the defined medal passing sequence, and in particular, when a retrogressive movement is detected. Specifically, detection is performed based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (input sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, chute sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

  Further, “disbursed medal jam error”, “disbursed medal empty error”, and “auxiliary storage full error” are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality relating to medal payout or storage. First, a “dispensed medal jam error” is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during medal payout from the hopper 110 b. Specifically, when the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. Also, the “payout medal empty error” is an error that is notified when the medals in the hopper 110 b are empty. Specifically, when the medals from the hopper 110b are not normally dispensed but payout retry is performed, if the payout count switch is in the ON state over a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. Further, the “auxiliary storage full error” is an error that is notified when the medal secondary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full-tank sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of the medal exceeding the predetermined standard, the error is detected.

  The “priority” column in FIG. 102 indicates the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the priority means the degree of priority when a plurality of errors are detected simultaneously, and even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , The display content is not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of the high priority error detected later. In the "SEG" column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, it is impossible to resume the game (play the next game) unless the errors are canceled.

  Further, in the “informing method” column, when “video” is “o”, for example, the image display body 500 displays an image for notifying an error. However, the notification image by the “image” is required to be the display content which is not different from the error display in the special display LED 612. When the “sound” is “o”, for example, the notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the "lamp" is "o", for example, the error lamp 604 is lit or blinks. In the notification by sound output or lamp output, the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error with high priority is detected, it is an error with low priority. The notification mode may be emphasized as compared.

  Further, in the “reset release” column, it is indicated whether or not the error can be released by the reset performed by operating the reset switch 112 u. As the error that can be reset-cancelled, when the error is canceled by reset, the data area of “clear range 2” (see FIG. 101) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

  Also, when “immediately” is described in the “responsiveness” column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side when the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when a fraudulent-delivery error is detected, the main substrate 409 immediately issues a command notifying of the detection. That is, even if "immediately" is described, it is not always necessary to immediately display an error at the time of detection of the error, for example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the end of the payout process or the payout process) An error may be displayed before the start of. The fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error that means that the gaming value is fraudulently paid out.

11-7. Processing when an error occurs]
In the following, the processing (processing when an error occurs) when the error described in the previous chapter occurs in the slot machine 1 will be described. The specific details of the error processing differ depending on what requirements the slot machine 1 has regarding errors. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) regarding an error as shown below, and the details of the error occurrence process performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Do not perform grouping (for example, strong error and weak error) based on the degree of importance for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game is over.
(3) Even when an error is detected during the game, the indication function indication is continuously displayed.

  FIGS. 103 and 104 are flowcharts (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the process when an error occurs in the first embodiment. FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 together form one flowchart, and this flowchart details the processing performed when an error occurs, based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 54 and the overall processing procedure of one game. It shows. Note that FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses in a non-power-off state (that is, in a state where the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 105 described later is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure of the power failure return process in the first embodiment. In FIG. 105, the processing procedure is applied also when the power OFF / ON is performed in the processing of FIGS.

[11-7-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (during no power off)]
Referring to FIGS. 103 and 104, the procedure of one game (non-power-off) including an error occurrence process will be described. In addition, since the flow of the whole process overlaps with a series of processes shown in FIG. 54, the detailed description of the processes already described is omitted. Also, when there is no special description, each processing in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 is executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). Further, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with "state of gaming machine" shown in FIG. 90 is also shown.

  First, in FIG. 103, as described in the BET processing of FIG. 54, the game is performed by pressing the start lever 210 by the player after the game value (specifically, the medal) has been inserted by a specified number. It is started (step S801). The flow of such a game corresponds to "insert medal" to "start lever pressed" shown in FIG.

  When the start lever 210 is depressed to start the game, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

  Next, in step S804, it is determined by the special display LED 612 whether or not it is a section in which the indication function can be displayed. Here, the section in which the indication function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an AT game) in which the indication function indication by the indication function can be executed. Heretofore, it has been mainly described that the indication function display is performed during the AT game, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a specific game period other than the AT game (for example, the AT is relatively won Even if it is an easy chance zone (CZ) or the like, the indication function may be displayed. In such a case, even in games other than the AT game, an affirmative determination can be obtained in step S804.

  If it is determined in step S804 that the section is capable of indicating the indication function (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 performs the indication by the indication function) (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S803. The instruction content by the instruction function is determined based on the acquired condition device (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

  Thereafter, rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S 807 corresponds to “reel rotation start” shown in FIG. 90. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub substrate 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, based on the received instruction information command, the sub board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to navigation display. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

  After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). A specific display example of the indication function display is as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. In addition, the predetermined display timing regarding "navigation display" and "instruction function display" is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the indication function display in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that the section is not a section in which the indication function can be displayed (specifically, if it is not determined that the main board 409 performs an indication by the indication function) (NO in step S804) The rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811) and the acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811). Step S812).

  Steps S810 and S812 correspond to "reel stop button press acceptance acceptable" shown in FIG. Then, after the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described in FIG. 96 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to "pressing the first stop button" shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the pressing of the second stop button performed thereafter (step S814). When an error is not detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 104, when an error is detected in step S814, it is shown that the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reels 301 being rotated. After the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301, the process of step S819 may be performed. The same applies to step S816. In such processing after error detection, differences in priority (importance) may be provided in accordance with the type of error, and processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, errors that are unlikely to occur in a normal gaming situation such as “HF (circumvention error)” should be high priority errors. Then, when such an error with high priority is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S 819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reels 301 being rotated. preferable.

  In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (the second stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described in FIG. 96 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to the "second stop button pressed" shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the pressing of the third stop button performed thereafter (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reels 301 being rotated.

  In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (the third stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described in FIG. 96 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to "pressing the third stop button" shown in FIG.

  Next, the main substrate 409 determines whether or not an error is detected during a predetermined period of time after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, while all the reels 301 stop). (Step S818). Thereafter, regardless of the presence or absence of the error detection in step S818, the process of step S819 is performed.

  In step S819, the indication function indication on the special indication LED 612 is ended. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the section is not a section in which the indication function can be displayed (NO in step S804), no indication function indication in step S809 is performed, and thus special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

  Thereafter, in step S820, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "all reels stop" shown in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 104, the processing in step S819 and step S820 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection in the game until then, but in the subsequent processing, it is determined whether or not an error is detected. It depends on the person. Specifically, when an error is not detected during the previous game, the process from step S821 is performed, and when an error is detected during the previous game, the process from step S825. Is done.

  First, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the previous game, in step S 821, it is determined whether or not a game value is paid out. In the payout of gaming value, when the termination of the winning combination is confirmed based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that no payout is made (NO in step S821), no error is detected, and the game is ended. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), display of the number of payouts in the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and payout processing for gaming value (medal) is performed (step S823) . Thereafter, since no error is detected, the game is ended.

  On the other hand, as a process when an error has been detected during the previous games, first, the presence or absence of payout for gaming value is determined (step S824).

  The process of step S824 is the same as the process (step S821) when an error is not detected, and steps S822 (disbursed number display) and S823 performed when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824). The processing of (payment processing) is also the same.

  However, when an error is detected during the previous game, the processing of steps S826 and S827 is performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process ends, the number-of-payouts display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and the processes after step S826 are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that no payout is made, the processes in step S826 and subsequent steps are performed.

  In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the type of the error detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. After that, an error release process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the store clerk or the sales office (step S827), and the game is ended.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the processing shown in FIGS. 103 and 104 is performed, and when an error is detected during the game, the indication function display or the number of payouts is displayed in the special display LED 612. It is possible to notify the player or the hall clerk or the like of the type of the detected error by displaying an error without interrupting the display.

  In the following, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 103 and 104, the display period by the various indicators etc. will be specifically described. In a social situation.

  FIGS. 106 to 109 are timing charts showing an example of the display period (Nos. 1 to 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. In FIGS. 106 to 109, it is assumed that all of the situations (for example, during AT) occur in which the indication function occurs.

  First, in the case of FIGS. 106 to 108, when an error occurs (at the time of detection), the details of the error are displayed immediately on the display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub substrate 510. A chart is shown. That is, simultaneously with the occurrence of the error 807 being turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is also turned on. However, it is assumed that the liquid crystal navigation 805 can not be "displayed" while the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Such setting can be realized, for example, by transmitting the detection information of the error to the sub-substrate 510 at a timing when the main substrate 409 detects the error.

  In FIG. 106, in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of the reel rotation start. At this time, while the error display (liquid crystal error 806) on the image display body 500 is simultaneously performed, the error display (segment error 804) on the special display LED 612 is not performed until the entire reel is stopped.

  In FIG. 107, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the start timing of the stop button pressing acceptance start. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is simultaneously turned on (displayed), and the navigation display 805, which has been turned on (displayed) before the occurrence of the error, is changed to off (not displayed) with the liquid crystal error 806 turned on. Ru. Then, the seg error 804 is turned on (displayed) only after all the reels have been stopped and the payout process for gaming value has been completed.

  In FIG. 108, in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is simultaneously turned on (displayed), and the navigation display 805 that has been “displayed” before the occurrence of the error is changed to off (not displayed) in response to the liquid crystal error 806 being turned on. Then, the seg error 804 is turned ON (displayed) only when the reels are completely stopped.

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 106 to FIG. 108, when an error occurs, the special display LED 612 displays an error after the end of the game, while the image display body 500 displays the occurrence of the error immediately, The occurrence of an error of a player or the like can be notified promptly. Further, the special display LED 612 can display the display periods of the indication function display, the number-of-payouts display, and the error display without overlapping each other. However, in the case of FIG. 106 to FIG. 108, although the game progress is not interrupted, since the LCD navigation 805 is made "non-display" when the liquid crystal error 806 becomes "display", the instruction while watching the navigation display In some cases, stop operation along the function can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 109, the detailed display of the error in the display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub substrate 510 is at the timing of the error display controlled by the main substrate 409 The timing chart is shown with the setting of “Match”. That is, even if the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is not set to "display" until the segment error 804 becomes "display". Such setting can be realized, for example, by the main board 409 not only transmitting error detection information to the sub board 510 but also notifying the timing for displaying an error with the special display LED 612.

  In FIG. 109, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button. At this time, the display related to the instruction function (the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805) is continuously displayed until the third stop button is pressed, and proceeds to the subsequent payout processing as usual. Then, when the payout is completed, an error display (segment error 804 and liquid crystal error 806) on the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 is performed. Thereafter, when the error is canceled according to the error and the error is eliminated, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 are turned off (not displayed), and the error occurrence 807 is also turned off.

  Thus, in the case of FIG. 109, even if an error occurs, after the end of the game in the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 (strictly speaking, when there is a payout, when the payout is completed, or when there is no payout, all An error is displayed at the time of the reel stop, and detection of an error in the game without interrupting the game progress and the game operation (specifically, the stop operation along the instruction function while watching the navigation display, etc.) Can be reliably reported. That is, in the case of FIG. 109, with regard to the indication function indication, the number-of-payouts indication, and the error indication in the special indication LED 612, the respective indication has meaning (the indication effectively acts), and the respective display periods can be secured. The display periods can be made not to overlap.

[11-7-3-2. Power failure recovery process]
A processing procedure of power failure recovery processing in the slot machine of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 105 is for all power failure recovery, such as power off / on in error release processing, simple power off / on when error does not occur, or recovery from sudden power failure due to a power failure, etc. It takes place in

  In FIG. 105, first, the power interruption process from all the states is started. In step S901, it is determined whether any of the power supply voltages is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold. As a specific example of the predetermined threshold determination, when the power supply device 112 includes a 24V power supply and a + 12V power supply, the power supply voltage of the 24V power supply is 20.4V or less, or the power supply voltage of the + 12V power supply Is determined whether or not 10.5 V or less. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold (NO in step S901), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S901 that any power supply voltage is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold (YES in step S901), processing for storing the stack pointer in the save area in the RAM 1114 is performed (step S902). The process of step S902 and the process of step S907 described later are as described in the description of the data area of the RAM 1114 in [11-7-1] (see also FIG. 101).

  Thereafter, after data protection processing (RAM protection processing) is performed on the RAM 1114 (step S 903), the slot machine 1 is put into a power-off state (step S 904). The process relating to the above-described RAM is not limited to the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and the same process may be performed by the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510.

  Then, when a power recovery operation is performed due to a person in charge of hall or automatic restart (step S905), first, it is determined whether or not any power supply voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (step S906). As the predetermined threshold value here, the same threshold value as illustrated in step S901 may be used. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S906), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S 906 that any power supply voltage is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S 906), the stack pointer stored in the save area of RAM 1114 in step S 902 is read to read necessary data (step S 907).

  Then, a process is performed to restore the stored sheet number display LED 613 to a displayable state (step S 908), and a process to restore the special display LED 612 to a displayable state is performed (step S 909).

  Next, in step S904, it is determined whether any one of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in a state (pre-power-off state) immediately before switching to the power-off state (step S910).

  If it is determined that any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the pre-power-off state (YES in step S910), this means that the reel stop operation has not been completed, so The content of the indication of the indication function stored in the RAM 1114 (more specifically, the indication function display area 1114i shown in FIG. 101) is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S911). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  If it is determined that none of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating during the pre-power-off state (NO in step S910), whether or not the pre-power-off state is the "reel all stop" and "with-out" status Is determined (step S912). If it is determined that the condition is “reel all stop” and “with payout” (YES in step S 912), the number of payouts is displayed on the special display LED 612. The information on the number of payouts can be read out by referring to the payout display area 1114h, in addition to referring to the saved stack pointer of the RAM 1114, for example. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S912 that the condition is not "reel all stop" or "no payout" (NO in step S912), it is determined whether an error is detected (step S914). ). If it is determined that an error is detected (YES in step S914), information about the detected error is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S915). At this time, the error lamp 604 may be turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916. When negative determination is obtained by step S914, it progresses to step S916 as it is.

  After the processes of steps S905 to S915 described above are performed, other recovery processes (details are omitted) are performed in step S916, and the slot machine 1 is in the pre-power-supply state before the power-off state in step S904. Return to

  As described above, by performing the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 105, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the data or the data before the power failure is prevented while the power failure occurs even after the power failure occurs. An appropriate return such as display can be realized.

  In the following, when the power is cut off during the progress of the game, the power failure recovery process is performed based on the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. Or under specific circumstances.

  FIGS. 110 to 112 are timing charts showing an example (part 1 to part 3) of display periods (by various displays) when the power failure return process shown in FIG. 105 is performed during the game. FIGS. 110 to 112 assume that all the instruction functions occur (for example, during AT), and show examples of display periods by various displays as in the case of FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 described above. Although not shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the slot machine 1 automatically performs the power recovery after the power is restored if at least one of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating before the power is shut off. The rotation of the reel 301 which has been rotated by internal processing is resumed.

  In the case of FIG. 110, an error is not particularly detected, and the interruption of the power supply occurs between the “stop button press acceptance start” and the “first stop button press”. In FIG. 110, the power may be shut off at the same time as the “stop button press acceptance start”. At this time, the instruction function 802 and the LCD navigation system 805, which were "displaying" the instruction content, become "non-display" due to the interruption of the power, but when the power is restored thereafter, the indication before the power interruption is displayed again (Corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 105). Then, after returning from the power failure, the game proceeds in the same manner as normal. Further, since no error is detected during one game, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 remain "non-display".

  In the case of FIG. 111, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of “stop button pressing acceptance start”, and thereafter, the power is shut off before “first stop button pressing” . Here, the interruption of the power supply may be the interruption of the power supply due to the error that has occurred or may be the interruption of the power supply for another reason. In such a case, if the liquid crystal error 806 is immediately “displayed” in response to the occurrence of an error, the liquid crystal navigation 805 ends the “display” and becomes “non-displayed”. Thereafter, even if the power is restored after the power is shut off, the error is not canceled, so that the liquid crystal navigation 805 is "not displayed" and the liquid crystal error 806 is "displayed" in the image display body 500.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 111, since the special display LED 612 does not immediately display an error, the instruction function 802 is “displayed” from the timing of the stop button pressing acceptance start. Even after power is restored after a power failure, the contents of “display” can be redisplayed by reading out from the RAM 1114 (corresponding to step S 911 in FIG. 105). Then, with the special display LED 612, the segment error 804 is "displayed" after the completion of the payout.

  In the case of FIG. 112, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error is not particularly detected, and the power is shut off in the middle of the payout processing after the reels are all stopped. At this time, the number of payouts 803 is "not displayed" due to the interruption of the power supply, but it is "displayed" again after the power supply is restored (corresponding to step S913 in FIG. 105). ) So you can complete the payout.

  As described above, as illustrated in FIGS. 110 to 112, in the slot machine 1, even if the power is shut off during the game, the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. It is possible to restore the display status managed by the terminal before blocking.

[11-7-4. Other error processing]
In the above [11-7-3], an example of an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1 has been described, but in the following, another process example of the error occurrence process will be described.

[11-7-4-1. Common points and differences in processing when each error occurs]
In the following description of the other error processing, in each of the cases where the slot machine 1 includes the second to sixth requirement definitions different from the first requirement definition described above as the “error definition of an error”. The processing upon occurrence will be described. Also, in order to avoid confusion in the process of explanation, the slot machine 1 having the first requirement definition is a slot machine 1a, and the slot machines 1 having the second to sixth requirement definitions are the slot machine 1b to the slot, respectively. It is written as machine 1 f. Therefore, for example, "processing upon error occurrence in the first embodiment" described in the description of FIG. 103, FIG. 104, etc. is read as "processing upon error occurrence in the slot machine 1a having the first requirement definition". be able to.

  When slot machines 1b to 1f are compared with slot machine 1a, since the requirement definition on error occurrence processing is different, the processing procedure of error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition is different, but other control processing, configuration, etc. Common to the slot machine 1 described above. Therefore, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and the differences will be mainly described.

[11-7-4-2. Processing when an error occurs based on the second requirement definition]
The slot machine 1b has the following requirements as a second requirement definition regarding error processing.
(1) Perform grouping on a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is regarded as a "strong error", and an error having a degree of importance less than the "strong error" is regarded as a "weak error".
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game is over.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is canceled.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the indication function display is restored after the error is canceled.

  According to the second requirement definition, the processing required when only a weak error occurs is the same as the first requirement definition. Therefore, in the slot machine 1b, when only a weak error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 106 to 109) by the various displays shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition are It can be applied as error processing based on the requirements definition of.

  The slot machine 1b can also divert the processing of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 105 to the recovery processing at the time of power interruption, and therefore, the display period example at power interruption shown in FIGS. 110 to 112. Can be applied to the slot machine 1b.

  Note that classification criteria for “strong error” and “weak error” are not particularly limited, but for example, errors with high priority are “strong error” based on the “priority” of the error shown in FIG. 102, for example. You should do it. For example, all errors may be set to "strong error".

  FIGS. 113 and 114 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1b. In the following, the processing procedure of the error occurrence process based on the second requirement definition will be described focusing on the difference from the flowchart of the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition (FIGS. 103 and 104).

  First, the process of steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 113 is the same as the process of steps S801 to S812 of FIG. 103, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in FIG. 114, the player presses the first stop button, and a reel stop process is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed (step S830).

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S830 and the pressing of the second stop button performed thereafter (step S831). If no error is detected in step S831 (NO in step S831), the process in step S833 is performed. If an error is detected in step S 831 (YES in step S 831), it is determined as the process of step S 832 whether the detected error is a strong error. If it is determined that the error is strong (YES in step S832), the process of step S839 is performed. If it is determined that the error is not strong, that is, it is weak (NO in step S832), step S833 is performed. Go to the process of

  In step S833, the second stop button is pressed. Thereafter, as in steps S831 to S832, whether or not an error is detected (step S834), or whether the detected error is a strong error or not A determination of (step S 835) is performed. The same determination process (steps S837 and S838) is also performed after the third stop button is pressed in step S836.

  As described above, when a strong error is detected as a result of the detection of an error being determined in steps S830 to S838, as the process of step S839, the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error is held and the progress of the game is stopped. . When the progress of the game is stopped, the player can not stop the rotating reel 301. Note that, as a specific process of holding the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error, it is assumed that various data is saved in the RAM 1114 or the like.

  Then, after the progress of the game is stopped in step S839, an error release process corresponding to the generated strong error is required. Therefore, in step S840, whether the error release process is performed and the strong error is released. Is determined. In step S 840, the process does not proceed to the next process unless cancellation of the strong error is confirmed. Then, when cancellation of the strong error is confirmed (YES in step S 840), as a process return, the process is started again from the point of error occurrence.

  On the other hand, as a result of determination of detection of an error in steps S830 to S838, when no strong error is detected in any period (NO in step S837 or NO in step S838), the indication function display on the special display LED 612 End (step S841). When the process of step S841 is performed, only the strong error is not detected, and the case where the weak error is detected is included.

  Thereafter, in step S842, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. In step S843, it is determined whether or not the game value is paid out, and if it is determined that there is a payout, the special display LED 612 displays the number of payouts (step S844), and a payout process is executed (step S845).

  If it is determined in step S843 that there is no payout, or if it is determined that there is a payout and the processing in step S845 ends, it is determined as the processing in step S846 whether there is an error detection. If it is determined in step S846 that there is no error (NO in step S846), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S846 that there is an error (YES in step S846), this means that a weak error has been detected between steps S830 and S838, so it is necessary to display an error of the weak error. There is. Therefore, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S 847), and the details of the weak error are displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S 848). Thereafter, when the error cancellation processing of the error for which the error is displayed in step S848 is performed (step S827), a series of processing ends.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the slot machine 1b, when the weak error is detected during the game, the game progress is continued and the error display of the weak error is made after the game is over. On the other hand, if a strong error is detected during the game, then the progress of the game is immediately stopped, and the execution of the error release process is required. In addition, although the game progress is interrupted when a strong error occurs, after the error cancellation process, the indication function display is restored, so that the player can continue the game while confirming the instruction content.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1b, when an error occurs while the game is advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 113 and 114, what kind of display period by various indicators etc. will look like , Illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. In FIG. 115, it is assumed that a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT) is shown.

  In FIG. 115, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is on). ). In the slot machine 1b, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function indication in the special indication LED 612 is also kept "indication". Further, in the example of FIG. 115, the image display body 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the indication function display (“not display” of the indication function 802 and “display” of the segment error 804). Then, instead of the navigation display, an error display is performed (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), and the game is interrupted. However, the instruction function 802 and the navigation display 805 made “non-display” will be “displayed” again after completion of the error cancellation process for the strong error, so that the game is started from the situation before the strong error occurs. It can be resumed.

[11-7-4-3. Processing when an error occurs based on the third requirement definition]
The slot machine 1c has the following requirements as a third requirement definition for error processing.
(1) Perform grouping on a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is regarded as a "strong error", and an error having a degree of importance less than the "strong error" is regarded as a "weak error".
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game is over.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is canceled.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the indication function display is stopped and the error is not recovered even after the error is canceled.

  The third requirement definition (1) to (3) is the same as the second requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, similar to the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, various indicators shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition The display period examples (FIGS. 106 to 109) can be applied. Further, with regard to the recovery processing at the time of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 105 shown in the processing at error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1c.

  FIGS. 116 and 117 are flowcharts (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1c. Comparing the processing of FIGS. 116 and 117 with the processing of FIGS. 113 and 114 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, only step S 880 of FIG. 117 differs. That is, in FIG. 117, when it is determined in step S 840 that the strong error has been canceled, the main board 409 clears the display content of the special display LED 612 as the processing of step S 880. Is started.

  Then, by performing the process of step S 880, the slot machine 1 c can prevent the indication function display in the special display LED 612 from being recovered after the error release when the strong error occurs.

  According to such a slot machine 1c, when a "strong error" having a high degree of importance on the game occurs, even if the strong error is released, the state before the occurrence of the strong error is complete. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by not performing the indication function display after error recovery, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the game operation along the indication contents of the indication function in an abnormal game in which a strong error has occurred. By doing this, it is possible not to easily give the player a benefit when a fraudulent action that causes a strong error occurs.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1c, when an error occurs while the game is advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 116 and 117, what is the display period by various indicators etc. , Illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. In FIG. 118, it is assumed that a situation (for example, during AT) in which an indication function occurs is taken.

  In FIG. 118, similar to FIG. 115 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and at the timing of pressing the second stop button. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). However, in FIG. 118, in accordance with the requirement definition (third requirement definition) of the slot machine 1c, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function indication in the special indication LED 612 is also kept “display”. Further, in the example of FIG. 118, the image display body 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when the weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the indication function display (“not display” of the indication function 802 and “display” of the segment error 804). Then, instead of the navigation display, an error display is performed (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), the game is interrupted. Then, even if the error cancellation processing is performed thereafter, the display contents of the indication function display are cleared as shown in step S 880 of FIG. Do not show. Further, in the example of FIG. 118, the liquid crystal navigation is not similarly displayed after return. Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, after the release of the strong error, the player can not recognize the content of the instruction of the instruction function, and the game is advanced while the instruction function is not generated.

[11-7-4-4. Processing when an error occurs based on the fourth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1d has the following requirements as a fourth requirement definition for error processing.
(1) Perform grouping on a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is regarded as a "strong error", and an error having a degree of importance less than the "strong error" is regarded as a "weak error".
(2) If an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is strong or weak.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled whether it is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, an external end board communication command) to the external relay terminal board 131, so that the external relay terminal board 131 can be used. The error information is output to an external device (for example, a hall computer 1200 or a data display) connected to the

  The fourth requirement definition in such a slot machine 1d is common to only the third requirement definition (1), but in view of the other requirement definitions, a process required when only a weak error occurs. Is similar to the error processing based on the third requirement definition (that is, the same as the error processing based on the first or second requirements definition).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1d, as in the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition and the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, in the first requirement definition The display period examples (FIGS. 106 to 109) by various displays shown in the error occurrence processing based on the above can be applied. Further, with regard to the recovery processing at the time of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 105 shown in the processing at error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1d.

  In the error process in the slot machine 1d, a predetermined error detection result is output to the outside through the external relay terminal plate 131 (which may be abbreviated as "outside plate"). And The slot machine 1d is connected to an external device (such as a hall computer 1200 or a data display) of the game arcade through the external relay terminal board 131 by providing the external relay terminal board 131 on the main substrate 409. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to an external device.

  FIGS. 119 and 120 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1d. In the following, an error occurs based on the fourth requirement definition, focusing on the difference from the flowchart of the error occurrence process based on the first or second requirement definition (FIGS. 103, 104, 113, and 114). The procedure of the hour process will be described.

  First, the process of steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 119 is the same as the process of steps S801 to S812 of FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 120, similarly to the processing in steps S813 to S832 in FIG. 114, whether or not an error is detected after the first stop button is pressed in steps S850 to S852, and further, the error is a strong error. It is determined whether there is any. However, in the case of FIG. 114, the game is suspended when it is determined to be a strong error (step S839 of FIG. 114), but even if it is determined to be a strong error in FIG. Progress is continued, and instead, a command (outer end plate communication command) indicating the occurrence of a strong error is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 (step S853).

  In FIG. 120, strong error occurrence information is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 in step S 853, whereby the strong error occurs in the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) connected via the external relay terminal board 131. Information can be output. Meanwhile, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1d is not stopped, and the process proceeds to the next stop button pressing process (step S854).

  In FIG. 120, even when the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), the process after pressing the stop button as shown in steps S850 to S853 is repeated. Detailed description of is omitted.

  When the processes of steps S850 to S861 are summarized, it is repeatedly determined whether an error is detected before the stop operation of all the reels 301 is performed by pressing the reel stop button 211, and in particular, a strong error is detected. If it is determined, the occurrence of a strong error is immediately notified via the external relay terminal board 131.

  And since the process of step S862-S870 shown in FIG. 120 is the same as the process of step S819-S827 of FIG. 104, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As an outline of the processing in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 120, the instruction function display is cleared when the stop operation for all the reels 301 is finished, and after all the reels 301 are subjected to stop processing, the winning combination is based. If a payout is detected and an error is detected during the game, an error is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the payout processing is completed, and an error release processing is awaited.

  Note that the error display shown in step S869 in FIG. 120 is an error display shown in step 826 in FIG. 104 (a weak error is an error display in that the error display is performed even if the error detected during the game is a strong error. Different from display). That is, in FIG. 120, when a strong error is detected, the error occurrence is notified to the external device through the external relay terminal board 131, while the error display of the error is also performed by the slot machine 1d itself after the game is over. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong error can be reported more reliably.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, in the slot machine 1d, even if any strong or weak error is detected during the game, the game progress is continued and the error display of the error is performed after the game is over. It will be. In addition, when a strong error is detected during the game, the occurrence of an error is immediately notified to the external device through the external relay terminal board 131, so the hall that manages the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) Stakeholders can easily notice the occurrence of an important error, and data management of the occurrence of an error can also be performed. In addition, it is possible to expect the effect of suppressing the burden on the player by not interrupting the progress of the game even if such a strong error occurs.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1d, when an error occurs while the game is advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 and 120, the display period by various indicators etc. will be displayed. , Illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 121 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 121 assumes that a situation (for example, during AT) in which an instruction function occurs is taken. Also, in FIG. 121, an outer end plate communication 808 is added as a timing chart showing the timing when the main substrate 409 transmits information indicating strong error detection to the external relay terminal plate 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is ON, it means that the above command is transmitted from the main substrate 409 to the external relay terminal plate 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is OFF, it means that the above command is not transmitted.

  In FIG. 121, as in FIG. 115 used in the description of the slot machine 1b and FIG. 118 used in the description of the slot machine 1c, a weak error occurs at the timing when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON). Furthermore, a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807 b is ON).

  However, in FIG. 121, according to the requirement definition (the fourth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, the game is not interrupted even if any strong or weak error occurs, and the error display is performed after the end of the game. Therefore, the "display" of the instruction function display 802 or the liquid crystal navigation 805 is not disturbed by the occurrence of an error. However, when a strong error is detected, the main board 409 immediately transmits information indicating strong error detection to the external relay terminal board 131 (the external terminal board communication 808 is ON). It is possible to notify the occurrence of a strong error in substantially real time to an external device connected via the interface.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121, an error display is performed after the end of the game (more specifically, after the completion of payout (in the case of a game without payout, after all reels have been stopped)) ("Seg Error 804" “Display” and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), it is possible to cancel the error before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-5. Processing when an error occurs based on the fifth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1e has the following requirements as a fifth requirement definition for error processing.
(1) Perform grouping on a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is regarded as a "strong error", and an error having a degree of importance less than the "strong error" is regarded as a "weak error".
(2) If an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is strong or weak.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled whether it is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, a display mode change command) to the display dedicated to the error, thereby displaying the display mode on the display as an error. Change to the specific display for the occurrence.

  The fifth requirements definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1e are the same as the fourth requirements definition (1) to (3), and only (4) differs.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1e, only weak errors are similar to the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, and the slot machine 1d having the fourth requirement definition. In the case where an error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 106 to 109) by the various displays shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition can be applied. Further, with regard to the recovery processing at the time of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 105 shown in the processing at error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1e.

  FIGS. 122 and 123 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1e. Comparing the processing of FIGS. 122 and 123 with the processing of FIGS. 119 and 120 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, only steps S881, S882 and S883 in FIG. 123 are different.

  In FIG. 123, when the first stop button is pressed (step S850), it is determined whether or not an error is detected (step S851). If it is determined that an error is present, whether the error is a strong error or not Is determined (step S852). When a strong error is determined in step S852 (YES in step S852), the main board 409 transmits a "display mode change command" to a display dedicated to errors as the process of step S881, and the display mode in the display Change to a specific display for when an error occurs.

  Here, the “display mode change command” is one of the means for notifying at least a specific indicator (for example, the error lamp 604 may be used) that at least a strong error has occurred. It may not be in the command format as long as a specific display can be made to notify the occurrence of a strong error in a specific display. Further, the “display mode change command” may not only convey the occurrence of a strong error, but also may convey details (type and the like) of the error that has occurred.

  In the error detection check after the second stop button (step S854) or the third stop button (step S858) is pressed, the processes in steps S882 and S883 are similar to the processes in step S881. The description is omitted because it is performed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1e, the processing in steps S881, S882, and S883 can be performed to notify that a strong error has occurred by using a specific display. The slot machine 1e has such a specific indicator separately from the indicator (special display LED 612) on which the indicator function display is performed, so that the indicator function indicator (in the case where a strong error to be notified immediately occurs). Furthermore, even while proceeding with the game without interrupting the navigation display, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the strong error.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1e, when an error occurs while the game is advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 122 and 123, what is the display period by various indicators etc. , Illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1 e. In FIG. 124, it is assumed that a situation (for example, during AT) in which an instruction function occurs is taken. Further, in FIG. 124, a display mode change 809 is added as a transmission timing of a “display mode change command” for changing the display mode to a specific display when the main board 409 detects a strong error. . When the display mode change 809 is ON, this means "send", and the above-described display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. When the display mode change 809 is OFF, this means "standby", and the display mode change command is not transmitted to the specific display. Moreover, although the change timing of the display mode in a specific display is not shown in figure in FIG. 124, suppose that it is changed immediately after the display mode change 809 turns into "ON (transmission)."

  In FIG. 124, as in the case of FIG. 121 and the like used in the description of the slot machine 1d, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and the timing of pressing the second stop button. A strong error has occurred at (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, the requirement definition (fifth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1 d is the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth requirement definition in (1) to (3), (4 Only differ). Focusing on this point, comparing FIG. 124 with FIG. 121 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, in FIG. 121, while the command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 when the strong error is detected, FIG. 124 is different in that a display mode on a specific display is changed by transmitting a display mode change command at the same timing. However, the display periods by the other displays are the same in FIG. 121 and FIG.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 124, it is preferable that the change of the display mode in the specific display is continued until the error cancellation of the strong error that caused the change is performed.

  In addition, as an example of the display mode of "specific display for strong error occurrence" in a specific display, when the error lamp 604 used for notification of the occurrence of an error from normal is also used, it lights up at the time of normal error notification. On the other hand, in the case of a specific display based on strong error detection, the display mode may be changed such as blinking. Also, when using a dedicated specific display, more detailed error notification can be realized by changing the notification pattern (lighting pattern, display image, voice output pattern, volume, etc.) according to the type of strong error. Can.

  According to the slot machine 1e, by enabling such "specific display for the occurrence of a strong error", when a strong error having a large degree of influence on the game occurs, an error occurrence can be notified promptly and surely. The game can proceed smoothly by not interfering with the display contents of the special display LED 612 for displaying the indication function and the display of the number of payouts, and the image display body 500 for performing the navigation display. Can be expected to

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124, an error display is performed after the end of the game (more specifically, after the completion of payout (in the case of a game without payout, after all reels have been stopped)) (Seg error 804 " “Display” and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), it is possible to cancel the error before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-6. Processing when an error occurs based on the sixth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1 f has the following requirements as a sixth requirement definition for error processing.
(1) Perform grouping on a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is regarded as a "strong error", and an error having a degree of importance less than the "strong error" is regarded as a "weak error".
(2) If an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is strong or weak.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled whether it is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the control pattern of the indication function indication by the main board 409 is changed to display the indication function indication in the special indication LED 612 as a strong error is detected. Change to a display mode that shows

  The sixth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1 f is the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1f, similarly to the slot machines 1b to 1e having the other requirement definitions described above, when only the weak error occurs, only the weak error occurs. The display period examples (FIGS. 106 to 109) by various displays shown in the error occurrence process based on the requirement definition of 1 can be applied. Further, with regard to the recovery processing at the time of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 105 shown in the processing at error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1f.

  125 and 126 are flowcharts (parts 1 and 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1f. Steps S 884 and S 126 in FIG. 126 are compared with the processing in FIGS. 119 and 120 in which the processing in FIGS. 125 and 126 is used in the description of slot machine 1 d and the processing in FIGS. Only S885 and S886 differ.

  That is, in the error occurrence process based on the sixth requirement definition, as shown in FIG. 126, a strong error is detected in the determination of the strong error (steps S852, S856, S860) in the error check after pressing each stop button. If it is determined that the main board 409 sends a command for causing the indication function to be displayed at the time of error occurrence (steps S884, S885, S886), the display mode of the indication function indication in the special indication LED 612 is The display mode (display of the indication function of pattern 1) for displaying only the instruction contents is changed to the display mode (display of indication function of pattern 2) for displaying that the strong error is detected together with the instruction contents.

  Here, an example of a specific control for changing the display mode of the indication function display when controlling the indication function display by a command will be described. By setting predetermined bits that are not used in the command for pattern 1, it is possible to combine the information indicating the instruction content and the information indicating the strong error, and transmit the command. In addition, as a display example of pattern 2 in the special display LED 612, in the case of pattern 2, it may be blinked, error information and instruction information may be alternately displayed, or bit seg may be lighted. Good.

  As described in the description of the "display mode change command" in the description of the slot machine 1e, in order to satisfy each requirement definition in the slot machines 1a to 1f, the communication format of the information does not necessarily have to be a command format, and the instruction In control of function display, input / output control may be performed in a form other than commands.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1f, the special display LED 612 can be used to report the occurrence of a strong error without interrupting the indication function display by performing the processes of steps S884, S885, and S886.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during the game, even if it is a strong error, the game progress by the player can be reliably provided by not interrupting the game progress. Furthermore, on the other hand, since the occurrence of a strong error can be reported promptly at a location (special display LED 612 on the display panel 501) that is easy for the player or the like to visually recognize, security for the slot machine 1f can also be secured. I can expect it.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs while the game proceeds based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 125 and 126, the display period by various indicators etc. will be as follows. , Illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 127 shows a situation (for example, during AT) in which a pointing function occurs. Further, in FIG. 127, since the display pattern of the indication function display is changed from the pattern 1 at the normal time to the pattern 2 at the occurrence of the error at the time of the strong error detection, the display period of the indication function display in each pattern is shown. As an alternative to the "instruction function 802" used in the other figures, "instruction function (pattern 1) 802a" and "instruction function (pattern 1) 802a" are added.

  In FIG. 127, a weak error occurs at the timing when the first stop button is pressed (the weak error occurrence 807a is the same as FIG. 121 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1d and FIG. 124 etc. used in the explanation of the slot machine 1e). Further, a strong error occurs at the timing when the second stop button is pressed (strong error occurrence 807 b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (sixth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1f, (1) to (3) are the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth or fifth requirement definition. , (4) is different. Focusing on this point, the display period (FIG. 127) in the slot machine 1f is compared to the slot machine 1d (FIG. 121) or the slot machine 1e (FIG. 124) when detecting a strong error. Then the command is sent to the external relay terminal board 131, and the display mode change command is sent to the specific display in FIG. 124, while the pattern of the display mode of the indication function display is shown at the same timing in FIG. By changing, the special display LED 612 is different in that the indication function indication of pattern 2 is displayed. However, the display periods by the other displays are the same as in FIGS. 121, 124, and 127.

  Further, according to FIG. 127, the “display” of the function display 802a is switched to the “display” of the instruction function 802b at the timing of pressing the second stop button at which the strong error occurs (the timing when the strong error occurrence 807b turns ON). Be Then, the indication function display of pattern 2 is continuously displayed until the timing of pressing the third stop button. That is, in the slot machine 1f, even if the indication function indication is changed to pattern 2 due to the detection of the strong error, the indication function indication of pattern 2 is continued until the original display period by the indication function indication is finished. It means that.

  According to such a slot machine 1f, while the progress of the game is not interrupted due to the occurrence of an error and the instruction content of the instruction function is continuously displayed, the instruction function is displayed when an important strong error occurs. In order to make it possible to notify of the occurrence of the error by changing the mode of the game machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that achieves both smooth progression of the game and quick response to the abnormal state.

  Further, although the details are as illustrated, the liquid crystal error 806 controlled by the sub substrate 510 is also “displayed” at the same timing after the end of the game as the segment error 804. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, the error display is performed after the end of the game (more specifically, after the completion of the payout (in the case of a game without payout, after all the reels have stopped)), the next game can be performed. You can get rid of the error before you begin.

  The slot machines 1a to 1f may be combined as appropriate as long as the requirements of the process for error occurrence processing do not interfere with each other. For example, if error processing based on the first requirement definition is limited processing related to weak errors, it can be combined with the second to sixth requirement definitions. Further, for example, by combining the processing at the time of the strong error detection in the fourth to sixth requirement definitions, a broad notification can be realized at the time of the strong error detection.

  In the slot machine described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main substrate 409 corresponds to the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the special display LED 612 corresponds to the display device managed by the main control means. Do. The slot machine 1 is an example of a gaming machine capable of repeatedly executing a unit game that executes a lottery relating to a winning combination and displays a game result based on the lottery result of the lottery. Further, the main substrate 409 (especially the CPU 1110) is an example of lottery means for executing a lottery concerning a winning combination, and before the game result based on the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed, lottery information on the lottery result It is an example of the information display control means which can be displayed on a display apparatus. Here, having the display device display lottery information on the lottery result by the information display control means corresponds to the main substrate 409 displaying the indication function display on the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. Further, when the lottery information is displayed on the display device in the predetermined display mode, the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110) does not change the winning combination selected by the lottery means in the same unit game, It corresponds to information display variable means capable of changing the display mode on the display device to a special display mode different from the predetermined display mode until the game result is displayed. The change from the predetermined display mode to the special display mode by the information display changing means corresponds to the change in the display mode in the display (special display LED 612) on which the indication function display is performed in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment. The predetermined display mode can be replaced with the first display mode, and the special display mode can be replaced with the second display mode.

  Although the above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than slot machines, for example, pachinko machines, gaming machines formed by combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine, and the like.

1 slot machine 10 gap 21 transparent plate 50 model unit 90 front opening / closing member 100 outer main body 100a rotary shaft 101 bottom plate 102 side plate 102 side plate 102a convex portion 102b guard portion 103 top plate 104a heat radiation port 104b code outlet 105 partition plate 106 stepped portion 107 Piece 108 attachment piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow rod 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary storage box for game medals 111a full medal sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e side plate 112f inclined plate 112g air hole 112h leg 112i air space 112j step 112k mounting piece 112m protrusion 112m-1 protrusion 112m through hole 112r bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Attachment 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal board 132 Through hole 133 Air vent 200 Door shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 One sheet loading button 206 MAX loading button 207 medal selector 207a solenoid 207b input sensor 208 medal return button 209 storage release switch 210 start lever 211a left reel stop button 211b middle reel stop Button 211c right reel stop button 212 medal 樋 213 return rod 214 transparent window 214a transparent plate 214b edge member 214c through hole 214d through hole 215 lock device 215a base member 215b support piece 216 forehead frame 217 light emitting unit 217a light emitter 217a-1 light source 217a -2 light guide plate 217b reflective member 218 fixed member 219 recessed groove 300 symbol variation display device 301a left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (third reel)
302 device case 303 drive means 304 bottom plate 305 top plate portion 305 top plate portion 306 right side plate 307 left side plate 308 rear plate 309 upper swash plate 310 lower swash plate 311 handle 312 reel substrate 313 cable 315 retaining portion 316 grips 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcing bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Back plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main substrate 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave part 413 Taper part 414 Wheel 415 引 416 Hook part 417 Triangle space 418 Tack member shelf 4 0 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Rotation member 420c Short link 420d Length link 420e Fixing piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Polymerization area 420h Polymerization area 420h Polymerization area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Locking piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receiver 430 Perforated hole 431 Attached piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Tab piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display body 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 lighting device 503 substrate 505 light transmitting lid plate 506 tube frame 507 light transmitting cover 508 receiving portion 509 engaging portion 510 sub substrate 512 speaker 600 upper beam 601 fixing member 602 tool 603 screw 604 error lamp 606 replay lamp 608 start lamp 610 medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Number of storages indicator LED
614 BET lamp 623a right downward line 623b upward right line 700 note connector 701 fixed sheath member 701a prevention piece 702 rod 702a axial hole portion 702b hook wall 703 stop shaft 703a spring 704 stopper 705 groove 706 knob piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

Multiple mobiles with multiple symbols,
Start operation means for rotating the plurality of movable bodies;
Stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable bodies;
A winning combination determination unit configured to determine one of a plurality of winning combinations among a plurality of winning combinations based on operation of the start operation unit;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the symbol combination when all of the plurality of movable bodies are stopped;
A game machine comprising: delay means for delaying a time from when the start operation means is operated to when the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective ;
The winning combination includes a pressing response combination in which the benefit provided by the benefit giving means is different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means,
The first display device and the second display device are instruction displays indicating an operation mode of the stop operation means in which the benefit provided by the benefit giving means becomes advantageous when the pressed-in correspondence determining means is determined by the winning combination determining means. It is made to be able to be shown in
When the operation to the stop operation means is performed under the situation where the instruction display is shown on the first display device and the second display device, the instruction display shown on the first display device is not changed The instruction display shown on the second display device can be changed to a display different from the instruction display .
The instruction display shown on the first display device which does not change even when the operation to the stop operation means is performed is shown immediately before the acceptance of the operation of the stop operation means is permitted, and the delay Even when the time from when the starting operation means is operated to when the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective is delayed by the means, it is shown just before the acceptance of the operation of the stop operation means is permitted. A game machine characterized by